You are on page 1of 440

Magellan® 8100/8100Ω

8200/8200Ω

Model 8204 shown

Product Reference Guide


PSC Inc
959 Terry Street
Eugene, Oregon 97402
Telephone: (541) 683-5700
Fax: (541) 345-7140
An Unpublished Work - All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this documentation or the procedures described therein may be repro-
duced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written permission of PSC Inc. or its wholly owned subsidiaries ("PSC"). Owners
of PSC products are hereby granted a non-exclusive, revocable license to reproduce and transmit this documentation for the purchaser's own
internal business purposes. Purchaser shall not remove or alter any proprietary notices, including copyright notices, contained in this documen-
tation and shall ensure that all notices appear on any reproductions of the documentation.
Should future revisions of this manual be published, you can acquire printed versions by contacting your PSC representative. Electronic ver-
sions may either be downloadable from the PSC website (www.psc.com) or provided on appropriate media. If you visit our website and would
like to make comments or suggestions about this or other PSC publications, please let us know via the “Contact PSC” page.
Disclaimer
PSC has taken reasonable measures to provide information in this manual that is complete and accurate, however, PSC reserves the right to
change any specification at any time without prior notice.
PSC is a registered trademark of PSC Inc. The PSC logo is a trademark of PSC. All other trademarks and trade names referred to herein are
property of their respective owners.
Magellan, FirstStrike and SurroundScan are registered trademarks of PSC Inc. All-Weighs, OmegaTek, Produce Rail, Productivity Index Report-
ing, SmartSentry and Any-Weighs are all trademarks of PSC Inc.

This product may be covered by one or more of the following patents: 4603262 • 4639606 • 4652750 • 4672215 • 4699447 • 4709369 • 4749879
4786798 • 4792666 • 4794240 • 4798943 • 4799164 • 4820911 • 4845349 • 4861972 • 4861973 • 4866257 • 4868836 • 4879456 • 4939355 •
4939356 • 4943127 • 4963719 • 4971176 • 4971177 • 4991692 • 5001406 • 5015831 • 5019697 • 5019698 • 5086879 • 5115120 • 5144118 •
5146463 • 5179270 • 5198649 • 5200597 • 5202784 • 5208449 • 5210397 • 5212371 • 5212372 • 5214270 • 5229590 • 5231293 • 5232185 •
5233169 • 5235168 • 5237161 • 5237162 • 5239165 • 5247161 • 5256864 • 5258604 • 5258699 • 5260554 • 5274219 • 5296689 • 5298728 •
5311000 • 5327451 • 5329103 • 5330370 • 5347113 • 5347121 • 5371361 • 5382783 • 5386105 • 5389917 • 5410108 • 5420410 • 5422472 •
5426507 • 5438187 • 5440110 • 5440111 • 5446271 • 5446749 • 5448050 • 5463211 • 5475206 • 5475207 • 5479011 • 5481098 • 5491328 •
5493108 • 5504350 • 5508505 • 5512740 • 5541397 • 5552593 • 5557095 • 5563402 • 5565668 • 5576531 • 5581707 • 5594231 • 5594441 •
5598070 • 5602376 • 5608201 • 5608399 • 5612529 • 5629510 • 5635699 • 5641958 • 5646391 • 5661435 • 5664231 • 5666045 • 5671374 •
5675138 • 5682028 • 5686716 • 5696370 • 5703347 • 5705802 • 5714750 • 5717194 • 5723852 • 5750976 • 5767502 • 5770847 • 5786581 •
5786585 • 5787103 • 5789732 • 5796222 • 5804809 • 5814803 • 5814804 • 5821721 • 5822343 • 5825009 • 5834708 • 5834750 • 5837983 •
5837988 • 5852286 • 5864129 • 5869827 • 5874722 • 5883370 • 5905249 • 5907147 • 5923023 • 5925868 • 5929421 • 5945670 • 5959284 •
5962838 • 5979769 • 6000619 • 6006991 • 6012639 • 6016135 • 6024284 • 6041374 • 6042012 • 6045044 • 6047889 • 6047894 • 6056198 •
6065676 • 6069696 • 6073849 • 6073851 • 6094288 • 6112993 • 6129279 • 6129282 • 6134039 • 6142376 • 6152368 • 6152372 • 6155488 •
6166375 • 6169614 • 6173894 • 6176429 • 6188500 • 6189784 • 6213397 • 6223986 • 6230975 • 6230976 • 6237852 • 6244510 • 6259545 •
6260763 • 6266175 • 6273336 • 6276605 • 6279829 • 6290134 • 6290135 • 6293467 • 6303927 • 6311895 • 6318634 • 6328216 • 6332576 •
6332577 • 6343741 • 6454168 • 6478224 • 6568598 • 6578765 • 6705527 • 6974084 • 6991169 •7051940 • AU703547 • D312631 • D313590 •
D320011 • D320012 • D323492 • D330707 • D330708 • D349109 • D350127 • D350735 • D351149 • D351150 • D352936 • D352937 • D352938
• D352939 • D358588 • D361565 • D372234 • D374630 • D374869 • D375493 • D376357 • D377345 • D377346 • D377347 • D377348 •
D388075 • D446524 • EP0256296 • EP0260155 • EP0260156 • EP0295936 • EP0325469 • EP0349770 • EP0368254 • EP0442215 •
EP0498366 • EP0531645 • EP0663643 • EP0698251 • GB2252333 • GB2284086 • GB2301691 • GB2304954 • GB2307093 • GB2308267 •
GB2308678 • GB2319103 • GB2333163 • GB2343079 • GB2344486 • GB2345568 • GB2354340 • ISR107546 • ISR118507 • ISR118508 •
JP1962823 • JP1971216 • JP2513442 • JP2732459 • JP2829331 • JP2953593 • JP2964278 • MEX185552 • MEX187245 • RE37166 • Other
Patents Pending
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 1. Introduction.......................................................................................................... 1-1
Manual Overview .................................................................................................................... 1-2
How to Use This Manual ........................................................................................... 1-3
Manual Conventions ........................................................................................... 1-3
Scanner and Scanning-Scale Nomenclature .......................................................................... 1-4
Connectors ................................................................................................................ 1-5
Physical Parameters ............................................................................................................... 1-6
Scanning .................................................................................................................... 1-6
Weighing .................................................................................................................... 1-6
Rated Weight Capacity ....................................................................................... 1-6
Minimum Increment ............................................................................................ 1-6
Maximum Static Weight (Overload) .................................................................... 1-6
Automatic Zero Maintenance .............................................................................. 1-7
Warm-Up Time .......................................................................................................... 1-7
Thermal Equilibrium ............................................................................................ 1-7
Power-up ............................................................................................................. 1-7
User Configurable Warm-up ............................................................................... 1-7
Electrical Specifications .......................................................................................................... 1-9
Power Supply ............................................................................................................ 1-9
Laser and Product Safety ..................................................................................................... 1-10
Labeling ................................................................................................................................ 1-12
Bar Codes Supported ........................................................................................................... 1-14

Section 2. Site Preparation and Installation........................................................................ 2-1


Pre-Installation Considerations ............................................................................................... 2-2
Checkstand Design ................................................................................................................. 2-3
Scanner Installation ................................................................................................................ 2-4
Scanner Maintenance ............................................................................................................. 2-4
Ergonomic References ........................................................................................................... 2-4
Scanner Usage ....................................................................................................................... 2-4
Site Preparation Overview ...................................................................................................... 2-5
Ventilation and Spacing .......................................................................................................... 2-7
Service Access ....................................................................................................................... 2-8
Power Installation ................................................................................................................... 2-9
Grounding .................................................................................................................. 2-9

Product Reference Guide i


Checkstand Preparation ........................................................................................................2-10
Liquid Spills and Moisture ........................................................................................2-10
Counter Cutout ......................................................................................................................2-11
Checkstand Mounting ..............................................................................................2-17
Installation Overview .............................................................................................................2-17
Unpacking ................................................................................................................2-17
Operational Verification ............................................................................................2-19
Diagnostic Modes .....................................................................................................2-21
Scanner Diagnostic Mode .................................................................................2-21
Scale Diagnostic Mode ......................................................................................2-22
Cables & Connections ..............................................................................................2-22
Remote Scale Display Placement/Installation .......................................................................2-24
Lighting Considerations ............................................................................................2-24
Viewing Angle ..........................................................................................................2-25
Placing and Installing the Remote Scale Display .....................................................2-26
(Short Pedestal Base ONLY) .............................................................................2-26
Changing Weighing Modes ......................................................................................2-29
Set-Up & Installation ..............................................................................................................2-29
Set-up .......................................................................................................................2-29
Installation ................................................................................................................2-31
System Power-Up Recap ......................................................................................................2-33

Section 3. Operation and Maintenance ................................................................................3-1


Scanning Items ..........................................................................................................3-1
Proper Scanning Technique ................................................................................3-2
Proper Weighing Technique .......................................................................................3-3
Operational Controls ...............................................................................................................3-4
Operational Modes ..................................................................................................................3-4
Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation ...........................................................................3-4
Power-Up/Selftest ................................................................................................3-4
Error Reporting ....................................................................................................3-5
Operational Configuration ....................................................................................3-5
Operating Mode .........................................................................................................3-6
Normal Operation ................................................................................................3-6
Sleep Mode .........................................................................................................3-6
Additional Functions ................................................................................................................3-7
Programming ..............................................................................................................3-7

ii Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Diagnostic Mode ........................................................................................................ 3-7
Scanner and Scale Reset .......................................................................................... 3-7
Scale Adjustments ..................................................................................................... 3-8
Zeroing the Scale ................................................................................................ 3-8
Calibrating the Scale ........................................................................................... 3-8
Operational Maintenance ...................................................................................................... 3-10
Vertical Scan Window Replacement ....................................................................... 3-11
Horizontal Scan Window Replacement (WRG) ....................................................... 3-13

Section 4. Problem Isolation................................................................................................. 4-1


Power-Up Selftest ............................................................................................... 4-1
Operational Tests ................................................................................................ 4-1
Diagnostic Tests ................................................................................................. 4-2
Diagnostic Procedures ............................................................................................................ 4-2
Error Codes ............................................................................................................................ 4-3
Scale Error Reporting ............................................................................................................. 4-6
Flowcharts .............................................................................................................................. 4-8

Section 5. Calibration ............................................................................................................ 5-1


Description of Calibration Sequence ...................................................................................... 5-2
Motion Test ............................................................................................................................. 5-3
Automatic Zero Setting Test ................................................................................................... 5-3
Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration .......................................................................... 5-4
Calibrating the Scale (Pounds & Kilograms) ........................................................................... 5-4
Calibration Verification (U.S. Pounds) .................................................................................... 5-8
Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1) ................................................................................ 5-9
Shift Test ................................................................................................................... 5-9
Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2) ............................................................................. 5-11
Blanking Test ........................................................................................................... 5-11
Decreasing-Load Test ............................................................................................. 5-12
Return to Zero Test ................................................................................................. 5-12
Calibration Verification (Kilograms) ...................................................................................... 5-13
Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1) .............................................................................. 5-13
Shift Test (Metric) .................................................................................................... 5-14
Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2) ............................................................................. 5-15
Blanking Test ........................................................................................................... 5-16
Decreasing-Load Test ............................................................................................. 5-17
Return to Zero Test ................................................................................................. 5-17

Product Reference Guide iii


Section 6. Programming ........................................................................................................6-1
Introduction to Label Programming .........................................................................................6-1
Understanding the Basics .......................................................................................................6-1
Integrating the Scanner With Your Host System .....................................................................6-1
Customizing Your Scanner’s Operation .....................................................................6-2
Programming Overview ...........................................................................................................6-3
Programming via Handheld Device ............................................................................6-3
What Is Programming Mode? ....................................................................................6-4
Entering and Exiting Programming Mode. .................................................................6-4
Programming Session ................................................................................................6-5
Programming Sequence ......................................................................................6-7
LED and Beeper Indicators .....................................................................................................6-9
If You Make a Mistake... ..........................................................................................................6-9
Return to Factory Settings .........................................................................................6-9
Test Mode ................................................................................................................6-10
General Scanner and Scale Features ...................................................................................6-11
Double Read Timeout ..............................................................................................6-11
Laser Timeout ..........................................................................................................6-13
Motor Timeout ..........................................................................................................6-15
Green LED Idle State ...............................................................................................6-18
Scanner Button Options ...........................................................................................6-19
Power-up Beep Control ............................................................................................6-21
Good Read Beep Control .........................................................................................6-23
Good Read Beep Frequency ...................................................................................6-24
Good Read Beep Length .........................................................................................6-26
Good Read Beep Volume ........................................................................................6-27
Good Read When to Indicate ...................................................................................6-30
Scale Enable ............................................................................................................6-32
Scale Country Mode .................................................................................................6-33
Scale Enforced Zero Return .....................................................................................6-35
Scale Interface Type ................................................................................................6-37
Scale Motion Level Filter ..........................................................................................6-39
Scale LED Enable ....................................................................................................6-41
Remote Display — Enable/Disable ..........................................................................6-42
EAS Active State ......................................................................................................6-43
EAS Timeout ............................................................................................................6-44
Aux Port Mode .........................................................................................................6-45

iv Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Productivity Index Reporting (PIR) .......................................................................... 6-47
Interface Related Features ................................................................................................... 6-48
Interface Type .......................................................................................................... 6-48
RS-232 Interface Selection ............................................................................... 6-50
RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf Interface Selection ...................................................... 6-51
RS-232 Single Cable Interface Selection .......................................................... 6-52
IBM Port 17 Interface Selection ........................................................................ 6-53
IBM USB Interface Selection ............................................................................ 6-54
Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length ......................................................... 6-55
Number of Host Transmission Buffers ..................................................................... 6-56
Global Prefix ............................................................................................................ 6-57
Global Suffix ............................................................................................................ 6-59
IBM Features ........................................................................................................................ 6-61
IBM Interface Options .............................................................................................. 6-61
IBM Scale Address .................................................................................................. 6-62
IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format ................................................................. 6-64
IBM USB Interface Options ..................................................................................... 6-65
IBM USB Scanner Device Type .............................................................................. 6-67
RS-232 Features .................................................................................................................. 6-68
RS-232 Baud Rate .................................................................................................. 6-68
RS-232 Number of Data Bits ................................................................................... 6-72
RS-232 Number of Stop Bits ................................................................................... 6-73
RS-232 Parity .......................................................................................................... 6-74
RS-232 Hardware Control ....................................................................................... 6-76
RS-232 Intercharacter Delay ................................................................................... 6-78
RS-232 Software Flow Control ................................................................................ 6-79
RS-232 Host Echo ................................................................................................... 6-80
RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval ............................................................................ 6-81
RS-232 Ignore Host Commands ............................................................................. 6-82
RS-232 TTL ............................................................................................................. 6-83
RS-232 TTL Invert ................................................................................................... 6-84
RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL .................................................................................... 6-85
RS-232 Beep After Weigh ....................................................................................... 6-86
RS-232 Beep on Not on File .................................................................................... 6-87
RS-232 ACK NAK Enable ....................................................................................... 6-88
RS-232 ACK Character ........................................................................................... 6-90
RS-232 NAK Character ........................................................................................... 6-91

Product Reference Guide v


RS-232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout ........................................................................6-92
RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value ............................................................................6-93
RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count ................................................................................6-94
RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling ............................................................................6-95
RS-232 Label ID Control ..........................................................................................6-97
Single Cable RS-232 Options ...............................................................................................6-99
Single Cable RS-232 Scanner Only Protocol .........................................................6-100
Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection .............................................................6-101
Single Cable RS-232 Use BCC ..............................................................................6-104
Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK .....................................................................6-105
Single Cable RS-232 Use STX ..............................................................................6-106
Set Single Cable RS-232 STX Character ..............................................................6-107
Single Cable RS-232 Use ETX ..............................................................................6-108
Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character ..............................................................6-109
Single Cable RS-232 PSC Extensions ...................................................................6-110
Symbology Programming ....................................................................................................6-111
UPC-A Enable .....................................................................................................................6-111
UPC-A Number System Character Transmission ..................................................6-112
UPC-A Check Character Transmission ..................................................................6-113
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 .....................................................................................6-114
UPC/EAN AIM ID ...................................................................................................6-115
UPC-A Label ID ......................................................................................................6-116
UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ...................................................................6-117
UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID ...................................................................6-118
UPC-A 128 Supplemental Label ID ........................................................................6-119
UPC-E Enable .....................................................................................................................6-120
UPC-E Number System Character Transmission ..................................................6-121
UPC-E Check Character Transmission ..................................................................6-122
Expand UPC-E to UPC-A .......................................................................................6-123
Expand UPC-E to EAN-13 .....................................................................................6-124
UPC-E Label ID ......................................................................................................6-125
UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ...................................................................6-126
UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID ...................................................................6-127
UPC-E 128 Supplemental Label ID ........................................................................6-128
EAN-13 Enable ....................................................................................................................6-129
EAN-13 First Character Transmission ...................................................................6-130
EAN-13 Check Character Transmission ................................................................6-131

vi Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


EAN-13 ISBN Conversion Enable ......................................................................... 6-132
EAN 13 Label ID .................................................................................................... 6-133
EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ................................................................. 6-134
EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID ................................................................. 6-135
EAN-13 128 Supplemental Label ID ...................................................................... 6-136
Bookland AIM ID .................................................................................................... 6-137
Bookland Label ID ................................................................................................. 6-138
EAN-8 Enable ..................................................................................................................... 6-139
EAN-8 Check Character Transmission .................................................................. 6-140
Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13 ..................................................................................... 6-141
EAN 8 Label ID ...................................................................................................... 6-142
EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ................................................................... 6-143
EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID ................................................................... 6-144
EAN-8 128 Supplemental Label ID ........................................................................ 6-145
EAN-8 Decoding Levels ........................................................................................ 6-146
Other UPC/EAN Options .................................................................................................... 6-149
UPC/EAN Reconstruction ...................................................................................... 6-150
Price Weight Check ............................................................................................... 6-151
Enable EAN Two Label ......................................................................................... 6-154
Addons .................................................................................................................. 6-155
UPC-A and EAN-13 Decoding Levels ................................................................... 6-157
GTIN Enable ....................................................................................................................... 6-160
GTIN Label ID ........................................................................................................ 6-161
GTIN 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ..................................................................... 6-162
GTIN 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID ..................................................................... 6-163
GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID ................................................................ 6-164
RSS-14 Enable ................................................................................................................... 6-165
RSS-14 Check Character Transmission ................................................................ 6-166
RSS-14/EAN-128 Emulation ................................................................................. 6-167
RSS-14 2D Component Enable ............................................................................. 6-168
RSS-14 AIM ID ...................................................................................................... 6-169
RSS-14 Label ID .................................................................................................... 6-170
RSS Expanded Enable ....................................................................................................... 6-171
RSS Expanded EAN-128 Emulation ..................................................................... 6-172
RSS Expanded 2D Component Enable ................................................................. 6-173
RSS Expanded AIM ID .......................................................................................... 6-174
RSS Expanded Label ID ........................................................................................ 6-175

Product Reference Guide vii


RSS Expanded Length Control ..............................................................................6-176
RSS Expanded Maximum Label Length ................................................................6-177
RSS Expanded Minimum Label Length .................................................................6-178
RSS Expanded Fixed Length 1 ..............................................................................6-179
RSS Expanded Fixed Length 2 ..............................................................................6-180
Code 39 Enable ...................................................................................................................6-181
Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission .........................................................6-182
Code 39 Check Character Calculation ...................................................................6-183
Code 39 Check Character Transmission ...............................................................6-184
Code 39 Full ASCII ................................................................................................6-185
Code 39 AIM ID ......................................................................................................6-186
Code 39 Label ID ...................................................................................................6-187
Code 39 Length Control .........................................................................................6-188
Code 39 Maximum Label Length ...........................................................................6-189
Code 39 Minimum Label Length ............................................................................6-190
Code 39 Fixed Length 1 .........................................................................................6-191
Code 39 Fixed Length 2 .........................................................................................6-192
Code 39 Stitching ...................................................................................................6-193
Pharmacode 39 Enable .......................................................................................................6-194
Pharmacode 39 Start Stop Character Transmission ..............................................6-195
Pharmacode 39 Check Character Transmission ...................................................6-196
Pharmacode 39 Label ID .......................................................................................6-197
Code 128 Enable .................................................................................................................6-198
Code 128 Transmit Function Characters ...............................................................6-199
Convert Code128 to Code 39 ................................................................................6-200
Code 128 AIM ID ....................................................................................................6-201
Code 128 Label ID .................................................................................................6-202
Code 128 Length Control .......................................................................................6-203
Code 128 Maximum Label Length .........................................................................6-204
Code 128 Minimum Label Length ..........................................................................6-205
Code 128 Fixed Length 1 .......................................................................................6-206
Code 128 Fixed Length 2 .......................................................................................6-207
Code 128 Stitching .................................................................................................6-208
EAN-128 Enable ..................................................................................................................6-209
EAN 128 AIM ID .....................................................................................................6-210
EAN 128 Label ID ..................................................................................................6-211
Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 OF 5) Enable ....................................................................................6-212

viii Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ..................................................................... 6-213
I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ................................................................. 6-214
I 2 of 5 AIM ID ........................................................................................................ 6-215
I 2 of 5 Label ID ..................................................................................................... 6-216
I 2 of 5 Length Control ........................................................................................... 6-217
I 2 of 5 Maximum Label Length ............................................................................. 6-218
I 2 of 5 Minimum Label Length .............................................................................. 6-219
I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 ........................................................................................... 6-220
I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2 ........................................................................................... 6-221
I 2 of 5 Stitching ..................................................................................................... 6-222
Codabar Enable .................................................................................................................. 6-223
Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission ......................................................... 6-224
Codabar Start Stop Character Set ......................................................................... 6-225
Codabar Start Stop Character Match .................................................................... 6-227
Codabar Check Character Calculation .................................................................. 6-228
Codabar Check Character Transmission .............................................................. 6-229
Codabar AIM ID ..................................................................................................... 6-230
Codabar Label ID .................................................................................................. 6-231
Codabar Length Control ........................................................................................ 6-232
Codabar Maximum Label Length .......................................................................... 6-233
Codabar Minimum Label Length ........................................................................... 6-234
Codabar Fixed Length 1 ........................................................................................ 6-235
Codabar Fixed Length 2 ........................................................................................ 6-236
Codabar Stitching .................................................................................................. 6-237
Code 93 Enable .................................................................................................................. 6-238
Code 93 AIM ID ..................................................................................................... 6-239
Code 93 Label ID ................................................................................................... 6-240
Code 93 Length Control ........................................................................................ 6-241
Code 93 Maximum Label Length ........................................................................... 6-242
Code 93 Minimum Label Length ............................................................................ 6-243
Code 93 Fixed Length 1 ........................................................................................ 6-244
Code 93 Fixed Length 2 ........................................................................................ 6-245
Code 93 Stitching .................................................................................................. 6-246
MSI/Plessey Enable ............................................................................................................ 6-247
MSI/Plessey Check Character Calculation ............................................................ 6-248
MSI/Plessey Number of Check Characters ........................................................... 6-249
MSI/Plessey Check Character Transmission ........................................................ 6-250

Product Reference Guide ix


MSI/Plessey AIM ID ...............................................................................................6-251
MSI/Plessey Label ID .............................................................................................6-252
MSI/Plessey Length Control ...................................................................................6-253
MSI/Plessey Maximum Label Length .....................................................................6-254
MSI/Plessey Minimum Label Length ......................................................................6-255
MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 1 ..................................................................................6-256
MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 2 ..................................................................................6-257
MSI/Plessey Stitching ............................................................................................6-258
Standard 2 of 5 Enable ........................................................................................................6-259
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ........................................................6-260
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ....................................................6-261
Standard 2 of 5 AIM ID ...........................................................................................6-262
Standard 2 of 5 Label ID ........................................................................................6-263
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control ..............................................................................6-264
Standard 2 of 5 Maximum Label Length ................................................................6-265
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Label Length .................................................................6-266
Standard 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 ..............................................................................6-267
Standard 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2 ..............................................................................6-268
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching ........................................................................................6-269

Appendix A. LED/Beeper Indications & Controls .............................................................. A-1

Appendix B. Cable Information ........................................................................................... B-1

Appendix C. Keypad ............................................................................................................ C-1

Appendix D. Host Commands ............................................................................................. D-1


Appendix E. Factory Defaults ............................................................................................. E-1

Appendix F. Handheld Data Format Requirements ...........................................................F-1


Handheld Data Format Requirements General ..........................................................F-1
PSC Handheld Data Format Requirements ...............................................................F-2
RSS-14 ................................................................................................................F-2
RSS Expanded ....................................................................................................F-2
UPC-A .................................................................................................................F-2
UPC-A with 2-Digit Supplemental ........................................................................F-2
UPC-A with 5-Digit Supplemental ........................................................................F-3
UPC-A with Code 128 Supplemental ..................................................................F-3

x Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


UPC-E ................................................................................................................. F-3
UPC-E with 2-Digit Supplemental ....................................................................... F-4
UPC-E with 5-Digit Supplemental ....................................................................... F-4
UPC-E with Code 128 Supplemental .................................................................. F-4
EAN-8 ................................................................................................................. F-5
EAN-8 with 2-Digit Supplemental ........................................................................ F-5
EAN-8 with 5-Digit Supplemental ........................................................................ F-5
EAN-8 with Code 128 Supplemental .................................................................. F-5
EAN-13 ............................................................................................................... F-6
EAN-13 with 2-Digit Supplemental ...................................................................... F-6
EAN-13 with 5-Digit Supplemental ...................................................................... F-6
EAN-13 with Code 128 Supplemental ................................................................ F-6
Code 39 .............................................................................................................. F-7
Code 39-Pharmacode ......................................................................................... F-7
I 2 of 5 ................................................................................................................. F-7
Codabar .............................................................................................................. F-8
Code 128 ............................................................................................................ F-8
MSI/Plessey ........................................................................................................ F-9
Code 93 .............................................................................................................. F-9
PDF417 ............................................................................................................... F-9
AIM Formats ............................................................................................................ F-10
UPC-A ............................................................................................................... F-10
UPC-E ............................................................................................................... F-10
EAN-13 ............................................................................................................. F-10
EAN-8 ............................................................................................................... F-10
2-Digit Supplemental ......................................................................................... F-11
5-Digit Supplemental ......................................................................................... F-11
Code 128 Supplemental ................................................................................... F-12
Bookland ........................................................................................................... F-12
Code 39 ............................................................................................................ F-12
Codabar ............................................................................................................ F-13
MSI/Plessey ...................................................................................................... F-13
Code 93 ............................................................................................................ F-13
RSS-14 ............................................................................................................. F-14
RSS Expanded ................................................................................................. F-14
I 2 of 5 ............................................................................................................... F-14
Code 128 / EAN128 .......................................................................................... F-15

Product Reference Guide xi


PDF417 .............................................................................................................F-15

xii Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Section 1
Introduction
This Product Reference Guide contains comprehensive instructions on
how to install the scanner or scanning-scale (either model may be termed
“scanner” for the purpose of simplicity in this manual), how to program it
using special programming feature bar code labels, and advanced user
information as described in the following overview.

Product Reference Guide 1-1


Manual Overview
Section 1, Introduction, presents the manual’s contents, describes features
and specifications, provides regulatory and safety information, and lists
the bar code symbologies the scanner will read.
Section 2, Site Preparation and Installation, supplies physical dimensions
for the scanner or scanning-scale and its most common accessories, and
details counter preparation and installation. Cable routing, connection
and testing are also explained in this section.
Section 3, Operation and Maintenance, describes use and maintenance;
providing details about operator controls, programming and diagnostic
modes, scale “zeroing” and calibration. Scanner and scale routine mainte-
nance are outlined in this section as well.
Section 4, Problem Isolation, provides an outline of three scanning-scale
test modes: Selftest, Operational Tests and Diagnostic Tests. Descriptions
of the error indications if the scanner detects a system problem and trou-
bleshooting flowcharts to aid in problem resolution are also presented.
Section 5, Calibration, explains scale calibration and verification proce-
dures, including procedures for calibrating the scale in pounds as well as
kilograms.
Section 6, Programming, details procedures and provides custom bar codes
for setting programmable scanner and scanning-scale features. This sec-
tion is organized by the categories: General Features, Interface Related
Features and Symbology Related Features.
Appendix A, LED/Beeper Indications & Controls, lists the various functions
and indications of the scanning-scale control panel features.
Appendix B, Cable Information, outlines wire requirements, connector
specifications and pinout details for associated product cabling.
Appendix C, Keypad, furnishes bar codes representing the digits and char-
acters required to enter extended programming data needed during certain
programming sessions.
Appendix D, Host Commands, contains a partial listing of available host
commands that can be used with a compatible host interface.
Appendix E, Factory Defaults, is a table listing factory defaults for the most
common interface types.
Appendix F, Handheld Data Format Requirements, is a useful resource.

1-2 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


How to Use This Manual
You’ll find it helpful to familiarize yourself with the first section of this
manual, since it provides both a general description of the product’s fea-
tures and an overview of the manual’s contents and organization. Refer-
ence the other sections as required for information about scanner or
scanning-scale installation, operation, maintenance, calibration and bar
code programming.

Manual Conventions

‘NOTE’ blocks contain information that is helpful


and recommended. They provide information that
is critical to operations and/or procedures
described in this manual.

‘LEGAL NOTE’ blocks indicate procedures or


LEGAL NOTE
activities which may be regulated under law by
governmental agencies. It is your responsibility to
ensure compliance with the regulations that gov-
ern installation of weighing devices.

‘CAUTION’ blocks inform you that proper handling


(adherence to the procedures described) is
required to avoid damage to equipment and/or
property.

‘WARNING’ blocks alert you to potential physical


harm or injury. These statements do not include
potentially fatal hazards, which would be desig-
nated as ‘DANGER’ blocks. Use of this product
does not warrant the need for a DANGER block.

Product Reference Guide 1-3


Scanner and Scanning-Scale Nomenclature
Controls, indicators and other nomenclature are shown in Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-1. Scanning-Scale Nomenclature

Volume/Tone Push Button Weighing Surface — Lean


Oversize Produce Here
Yellow LED Green LED

Scale Zero Bonnet


Push Button
Horizontal Vertical
Window Window

All Weighs™
Platter

1-4 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Connectors
The appearance of the connector panel will vary depending upon the fac-
tory options purchased with your model. Reference Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-2. Connector Panel

0.00

Aux. Port Remote Display Power Scale Host POS Terminal EAS Interlock

AUXILIARY PORT REMOTE DISPLAY POWER SCALE SCALE HOST POS TERMINAL EAS INTERLOCK
· Test Port Drives Remote Display AC Brick Input Factory Connected Scale Data (dual · Label Data · Provides Good Read
· On Screen OR cable scanner/scale) · Scale Data (for output to enable EAS
Programming (OSP) Power off Terminal single cable interfaces) antenna RF output
· Application Download (POT) Brick Input · Application Download · Provides signal to
· RS-232 Handheld (where appropriate) drive external speaker
Scanner Input
· Auxiliary RS-232
Label Data Output

Connection to Models with scale Dual cable units only. Connection to


this port is only (Scale connection may this port is
Optional be handled through Optional
POS Terminal port)

Figure 1-3. Connecting the Optional EAS Interlock Cable

EAS
Interlock
Connection

Product Reference Guide 1-5


Physical Parameters
This section provides specifications for performance, environmental and
electrical parameters. Reference the second section of this manual, Site
Preparation and Installation, for physical measurements of all models and
some accessories.

Scanning
The scanner has a scan zone between the two windows where the scanner
projects laser light in order to scan items. Three projections, two from the
horizontal window and one from the vertical window, combine to form a
zone where bar code labels are read. Refer to the Operation and Mainte-
nance section of this manual for more details about the topic: Scanning
Items.

Weighing
Specifications for scale capacity, settling time, minimum and maximum
static weight, zeroing, and warm-up time are given below. For more infor-
mation regarding the topic: Proper Weighing Technique, refer to the Opera-
tion and Maintenance section of this manual.

Rated Weight Capacity


The scale’s operational weight capacity is:
• 30.00 pounds, displayed in 0.01 increments
OR
• 15.000 kilograms1, displayed in 0.005 increments.

Minimum Increment
The minimum weight that can be accurately measured by the scale is 0.02
lb. (0.005 kg).

Maximum Static Weight (Overload)


A maximum static weight of 150 pounds (68 kg) can be sustained by the
scale without incurring damage or degrading performance.

1. The scale can also be set for 9.99 kg max.

1-6 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Automatic Zero Maintenance
The scale’s software constantly monitors and adjusts the Zero point as
long as the deviation is within acceptable limits1, while compensating for
any debris accumulation or removal. During power-up, the scale automat-
ically re-zeros after verifying that all subsystems are functional. Addition-
ally, the scale may be manually “zeroed” by pushing the Scale Zero Push
Button located on the top of the vertical enclosure.

Warm-Up Time
There are two pertinent warm-up times that apply to the scanner or scan-
ning-scale:

The two warm-up periods can be performed concurrently, thereby reducing


the total required warm-up time to 60 minutes.
NOTE

Thermal Equilibrium
When the unit is moved from a cooler temperature (such as a storage area)
to a warmer environment (such as a checkstand location), 60 minutes
must be allowed to acclimate the unit to ambient conditions prior to cali-
bration or operation.

Power-up
Once installed and powered up, a warm-up time of 15 minutes must be
allowed before calibrating or performing weighing operations.

User Configurable Warm-up


The user may configure the unit for a pre-programmed warm-up time
that is activated every time the scanner is powered up. During this time,
the scale is viewed by the POS terminal as off-line.

1. Acceptable limitis of deviation are set at -0.2 to +0.6 pounds (-0.078kg to 0.23kg), which is -0.67 to
+2.0% of total capacity.

Product Reference Guide 1-7


Contact technical support to learn more about this advanced programmable
feature.
NOTE

Figure 1-4. Environmental Specifications

Operation
+40 C +104 F

10 C 50 F

Temperature Dust Resistant Optics Cavity, IP5X


10 to +40 C
50 to +104 F

Illumination
Artificial Light: Sunlight:
0-200 Foot-candles 0-200 Foot-candles

Humidity
Hot / Wet 40˚C / 95% RH
Spill Proof Hot / Dry 40˚C / 5% RH
(PSC MS-0006-13-0004) Cold / Dry 10˚C / 5% RH
Warm / Wet 25%C / 50% RH

Storage
+70 C +158 F

-40 C -40 F
POS
Scan
ner

Temperature
-40 to +70 C
-40 to +158 F

1-8 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Electrical Specifications
Before installation, always verify that the site’s electrical service meets the
scanning-scale’s requirements. The scanner has been engineered for com-
patibility with most international electrical systems operating in ranges
from 100 to 240VAC at 50-60 Hz. Verify that the power source will sup-
ply “clean” electrical power to the equipment; that is, it must be free of
excess electrical noise.
Check the IEC power cord shipped with the scanning-scale. If the cord
will not plug into your AC power receptacle, the power cord shipped is
not compatible with your electrical system. Please contact your distributor
immediately to receive the necessary information and components to
ensure electrical compatibility.

Power Supply
The scanner utilizes a single power supply for all models. Unique installa-
tion and international connections are accomplished through selection of
the proper IEC power cord

VOLTAGE FREQUENCY CURRENT (RMS) PART NUMBER


100-240VAC ±10% 50-60 Hz 0.5 Amps @ 100V 8-0582

Safe operation of your scanner or scanning-scale requires properly grounded


electrical outlets. Be sure to have a qualified electrician certify the earth-
ground connection on circuits which will be used to power the unit.
CAUTION

The scanner is powered on/off by connecting/disconnecting its AC power


supply.
NOTE

Product Reference Guide 1-9


Laser and Product Safety
Laser safety requirements are based on IEC Standard Publication 60825-1
(2001) and CDRH 21CFR, Chapter 1, Subchapter J and (CDRH) Laser
Product Performance Standard, User information [1040.10(h)1]:
• User Maintenance. No user maintenance of the system other than
cleaning of the scan windows is required.
• Radiant Energy. The scanner is an IEC Class 1 and CDRH IIa
laser product. The system uses two embedded Class 3B Visible
Laser Diodes (VLDs) operating at 650.0 or 670.0 nm, in an
opto-mechanical scanner, resulting in less than 3.9µW radiated
power as observed through a 7mm aperture and averaged over 10
seconds. Maximum emitted peak output power at the lower win-
dow is 897µW. No attempt should be made by the user to remove
the protective housing of the scanning-scale.
• Laser Light Viewing. The horizontal and vertical scan windows
are the only apertures through which laser light may be observed
in this product.
Exposure to the light emitted from the scan windows has been shown not
to be harmful. The safety record of bar code scanning is perfect after mil-
lions of hours of use worldwide. This safe and efficient use of laser tech-
nology has gained wide acceptance in industries throughout the world.
Operators and installers of the unit should observe the following cautions
and warnings:

Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those


specified herein may result in hazardous laser light exposure.
The use of optical instruments with the scanner will increase eye hazard. (Opti-
cal instruments include binoculars, microscopes, telescopes and magnifying
glasses. This does not include eyeglasses worn by the user).
CAUTION To prevent exposure to laser light, do not remove the protective housing of the
scanner. There are no user-serviceable parts inside your scanner or scanning-
scale.

1-10 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Safety precautions to be taken:

No adjustments or alteration of the scanner or scanning-scale housing are to be


attempted by the user.
The failure of the facet wheel motor while the unit is continuing to emit a laser
beam causes the emission levels to exceed those for inherently safe operation.
The unit has safeguards to prevent this occurrence. If, however, a stationary
CAUTION laser beam is ever emitted, the failing unit should be disconnected from its
power supply until repaired by a qualified technician.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class
A digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are
designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when
the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment gener-
ates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interfer-
WARNING ence to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be
required to correct the interference at his or her own expense.

This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian


Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numerique de la classe A respecte toute les exigences du
Reglement sur le material broilleur du Canada.

Product Reference Guide 1-11


Labeling
Regulatory, reference and safety labeling is shown in Figure 1-5.
Figure 1-5. Labeling/Agency Compliances

0.00

Aux. Port Remote Display Power Scale Host POS Terminal EAS Interlock

• CAUTION-LASER RADIATION WHEN OPEN. DO NOT STARE INTO BEAM


PSC Scanning, Inc. • PRECAUCION-RADIACION LASER SI SE ABRE. ¡NO MIRE HACIA EL RAYO!
959 Terry Street • CUIDADO - RADIA=C7=C3O LASER QUANDO ABERTO. N=C3O OLHE PARA O RAIO.
CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT
• VARO-LASERSÄTEILY, JOS AVOINNA. ALA TUIJOTA SATEESEEN.
LASER KLASSE 1
Eugene, OR 97402 USA
• FARLIGTI-LASERSTRÅLNING OM ÖPPET. STIRRA EJ IN I STRÅLEN.
Product of USA • ADVARSELI LAERSTRALING VED ABNING. SE IKKE IND I STRALEN.

• VORSICHT-NACH Ö
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. •
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: • FARE! - LASERSTRÅLING NÅR ÅPEN. STIRR IKKE IN I STRÅLEN.
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and •
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation. THIS LASER PRODUCT COMPLIES WITH 21CFR 1040
AS APPLICABLE AS A CLASS IIA PRODUCT

Pro nit
ted y

mo
tes fet

du ore
cti d
Sa

on
PRODUCT SERVICE

NRTL
ACN 073200496

COVERED BY ONE OR MORE OF THE FOLLOWING U.S. PATENTS: 4,709,369 4,749,879 4,792,666 4,798,943 4,799,164 4,861,972 4,861,973

This illustration shows label 4,866,257 4,868,836 4,879,456 4,963,719 4,991,692 5,144,118 5,179,270 5,198,649 5,229,588 5,410,108 5,459,308 5,440,110 5,475,207
5,493,108 5,705,802 5,723,852 5,834,708 5,929,421 6,059,189 6,237,852 RE37,166 OTHER PATENTS PENDING U S

placement ONLY. For actual


regulatory, patent and other
applicable information, view the MAGELLAN 8xxx
SCANNER/SCALE MODEL 38x
PSC CLASS:XXXXXX-XXXXX-XX
labels on the product itself, or call PSC Manufacture Date: April 199x
PSC S/N: xxxxxxx
PSC Scanning, Inc.
your nearest sales or service office. 959 Terry Street
Eugene, Oregon, USA 97402 SERIAL NUMBER BARCODE

IEC
LASER
PRODUCT

6-0944

U.S., CANADA, MEXICO AND JAPAN

MAGELLAN SL® SCANNER/SCALE MODEL 38x


PSC CLASS:XXXXXX-XXXXX-XX
MANUFACTURED: April, 199x
PSC INC. PSC S/N: xxxxxxx
959 Terry Street
EUGENE, OREGON, USA 97402 SERIAL NUMBER BARCODE

IEC CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
LASER LIFE
MOTOR ENABLE
UP TO SPEED
+5V SUPPLY
+12V SUPPLY

n max=
III U.S., CANADA, MEXICO AND JAPAN
Class IIa Laser Product. Avoid long term viewing of direct laser light.
Appareil à laser de classe IIa. Éviter toute exposition prolongée de

emin=
la vue à lumière laser directe.
Clase IIa Producto Laser. Traté de no ver directamente
él Rayo Laser por muchó tíempo.
IIa
30.00 x Y
CAPACIT
9.995 x E
CAPACIT

emin= .01
n max= 300
UK xxx
AM-50
.01 lb

.005 kg

lb III
0
11
x

Scanner/Scale
ONLY CAPACITE

CAPACITY

1-12 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


The scanner and scanning-scale meet or exceeds the requirements for their
device type as set forth by the following agencies and regulations:

COUNTRY COMPLIANCE COMMENTS


Electrical
United States UL 1950 TÜV NRTL
Canada CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 1950 TÜV NRTL
World IEC60950 / IEC 825-1 TÜV CB
Australia AS 3260 AS (power adapter)
Japan MITI T-Mark (Power adapter)
Emmisions
United States 47CFR Part 15J FCC
Canada ICES-0003 Class B
Europe EN 55022 Class B
Australia/N Zealand AS/NZ 3548 Class B
Japan VCCI Class B
Taiwan CNS 13438 Class B
Safety & Emissions EMC Directive 89/336/EEC CE Mark
LV Directive 73/23/EEC CE Mark
Laser Safety
United States CDRH, 21CFR Part 1040 CDRH Class IIa laser device
Canada same as CDRH SGM-1 specification
Australia AS 2211
Weights & Measures
United States NIST Handbook 44 (Dept. of Commerce)
Canada Measures Canada
Australia NSC
New Zealand 1987 Part 1 Reg. 4, Reg. 4A
Mexico NOM NOM-019-SCFI-1994
New York New York Certificate
Europe EN45501 10IML R76 NWML
Contact PSC® Marketing at (541) 683-5700, or your PSC representative
for a complete listing of approvals for other countries.

Product Reference Guide 1-13


Bar Codes Supported
The scanner can read/decode the following bar code types (symbologies):
• UPC Versions A & E
• UPC Supplementals and Add-ons (2 & 5 digit supplimentals,
Coupon code and Code 128)
• Plural Stage Dual UPC Bar Codes for Japan ( 2 label read)
• Reduced Space Symbology (RSS) RSS-14, RSS expanded, RSS
Stacked
• EAN-8 & 13
• JAN-8 & 13
• UCC/EAN 128
• Code 39
• Code 39 full ASCII
• Code 128 (including conversion to Code 39)
• Code 93
• Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 of 5)
• Italian Pharmacode (Code 39)
• Codabar
• MSI/Plessey

1-14 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Section 2
Site Preparation and Installation
This section provides a reference for preparing most checkstands to receive
the scanner or scanning-scale. Included are physical parameters and
instructions for checkstand preparation, power and ventilation consider-
ations, cable routing information and unit installation.
Site Preparation lists all procedures necessary to prepare the checkstand.
The instructions that follow, titled Checkstand Preparation, detail steps for
the three models that are available (shown in Figure 2-1 below) to facili-
tate easy installation into almost any checkstand application around the
world:

Model 8100/8200 — Short Scanner Model 8103/8203 — Long Scanner

Model 8101/8201 — Medium Scanner Model 8104/8204 — Long Scanner/Scale

Model 8102/8202 — Medium Scanner/Scale

Some models are designed to fit with little or no modification into open-
ings cut for previously installed scanners such as other PSC® Magellan®
scanners, or NCR® scanner models 7820/24 and 7870. Other models are
designed for applications with smaller footprint requirements.
Once the procedures in this section are complete, the scanner is ready for
operation; with the exception that if a scanning-scale was installed, cali-
bration will be required before placing the unit into operation. You must
consult the local weights and measures authority to ensure that all legal
requirements are met concerning calibration and certification. Section 5,
Calibration, contains detailed procedures for calibrating the scale in either
pounds or kilograms.

Product Reference Guide 2-1


Figure 2-1. The 810x/820x Scanner and Scanner/Scale Family

Model 8100/8200 Model 8101/8201 Model 8102/8202

Model 8103/8203 Model 8104/8204

Pre-Installation Considerations
It should be noted that the scope of this manual does not encompass all
factors related to worker safety and checkstand design. It does, however,
offer a list of considerations that may be helpful in ensuring greater safety
and productivity. Careful planning using these general guidelines should
result in a more efficient, comfortable work environment.
The U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics reports that the incidence of repetitive
motion injuries has increased dramatically in recent years. Checkstand
design and scanner installation and operation procedures can reduce the
risk of repetitive motion injuries, but not eliminate it.
Although there are currently no formal guidelines for checkstand ergo-
nomics, the Food Marketing Institute (FMI) and the National Institute of
Occupational Safety (NIOSH) of the Department of Health and Human
Services have released the reports listed at the end of these recommenda-
tions. These reports contain useful suggestions for ergonomic improve-
ment of checkstand designs and scanner installation, maintenance and
usage. Portions of the reports are summarized below. For copies of the
complete reports, or to inquire about any modifications to the recommen-
dations, contact FMI and NIOSH at the addresses listed at the end of
these recommendations.

2-2 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Checkstand Design
1. Select a design which allows load-sharing by several muscle
groups (for example designs which allow the cashier to use both
hands for scanning and bagging).
2. Select checkstands which deliver products to the cashier on an
input belt and do not require the unloading of items from a cart.
These designs put less stress on the cashiers’ shoulders and back.
3. Minimize the distance between the input and take-away convey-
ors (i.e., the distance the cashier has to reach to move the prod-
ucts).
4. Minimize the width of the input conveyor to reduce the cashier’s
reach to items on the far side of the belt; use a diverter to direct
products closer to the cashier.
5. Select a design which encourages the cashier to slide products
across the scanner rather than gripping and lifting. Make sure the
horizontal surface of the scanner is flush with all surrounding sur-
faces.
6. Choose a design which integrates the scanner and scale to elimi-
nate extended reaches and lifts during weighing tasks.
7. Provide an easily accessible bag stand at a height 13 - 17 inches
(33 - 43.2 cm) lower than the top surface of the checkstand to
reduce stresses to the shoulders, elbows, and risks associated with
lifting products into bags.
8. Do not position the bag stand between the cashier and the scan-
ner, due to the increased reach involved.
9. Position the scanner’s horizontal scanning surface 34 - 36 inches
(86.4 - 91.4 cm) above the floor. Maintain a minimum of five
inches (12.7 cm) clearance between elbows and work surfaces.
10. Provide adjustable keyboard mounting (height, tilt, and horizon-
tal reach).
11. Position the printer, cash drawer, and other checkstand devices
the cashier uses within easy reach (less than 18 inches/45.7 cm).
12. Provide adequate toe space, foot rests or rails, antifatigue mats,
and where feasible, an adjustable seat or stand against which the
cashiers can lean.

Product Reference Guide 2-3


Scanner Installation
1. Mount the horizontal surface of the scanner flush with the coun-
tertop to encourage slide scanning rather than lifting.
2. Position the centerline of the scanner read area 8 - 10 inches (20.3
- 25.4 cm) from the edge of the checkstand (cashier side).
Scanner Maintenance
1. Keep scanner windows clean. This will improve productivity and
reduce rescans.
2. Replace scanner glass when excessive scratches are evident.
Ergonomic References
Anonymous, 1992, “Ergonomic Improvement of Scanning Checkstand
Designs”,
Food Marketing Institute
800 Connecticut Ave. N.W.
Washington, D.C. 20006

Grant, Katharyn A. et al., 1992, “Ergonomic Evaluation of Checkstand


Designs in the Retail Food Industry”,
National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health
4676 Columbia Parkway
Cincinnati, Ohio 45226

Scanner Usage
1. Minimize handling of heavy/bulky products. Leave these items in
the cart and use an alternative entry method such as key entry of
short PLUs, or handheld scanning.
2. Regularly train cashiers in proper scanning methods and ergo-
nomics principles, such as:
Develop a smooth fluid motion during scanning, sharing
work equally between hands.
Use the entire hand for grasping and lifting items.

2-4 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Since the scanner reads labels on all four sides plus the bot-
tom, there is no need to turn a bar code toward either of the
scanner windows.
Develop efficient scanning motions, not necessarily faster
hand movements. Simply slide the item across the scanner’s
horizontal window with as little orientation motion as neces-
sary.
Leave items in an upright position; do not lift and tilt.
Learn how the scanner functions and where the scanning area
is located.
Do not favor either the vertical or horizontal window; slide
items across the scanner in their natural orientations on the
checkstand as much as possible.
Site Preparation Overview
Consider the following factors before installing the scanner/scanning-scale
and its optional Remote Scale Display.
Ventilation Requirements. The scanner operates without the use of a
ventilation fan. As long as there is adequate convective air flow and no
major heat producing equipment in close proximity, the unit’s housing
provides adequate heat dissipation. The air temperature in the checkstand
around the scanner must not exceed 104°F (40°C).
Service Access Requirements. Routine operations such as ‘zeroing’
and calibration do not require removal of the scanner from the checkstand
or disassembly of the product. The installer should plan service access for
the AC/DC Power Supply and cables.
Recommended Power Installation. Since the typical grocery environ-
ment includes conveyor belts and electric motors, care should be taken to
ensure that the scanner has a supply of “clean” power (power without
excessive electrical noise). A wiring diagram shows the recommended wir-
ing that will provide the scanner with a “clean” source of power. Refer to
Figure 2-4.

Product Reference Guide 2-5


Counter Preparation. Since the majority of grocery checkout lanes are
designed as “left-hand take away,” the counter drawings in this section
focus on this counter design. Simply reverse the layout for a “right-hand
take away” requirement. The unit scans equally well in either of these two
configurations.
Liquid Drainage. Should a liquid spill occur, ensure that moisture can
flow through the checkstand without pooling.
Leveling. Plan ahead and provide screws/bolts in the checkstand mounts
and a leveling guide (board) to allow leveling of the scanner or scanning-
scale within the counter. Use a 0.375” thick board to replicate the mount-
ing flange on the long scanner or scanning-scale, and adjust screws or bolts
until the board is flush within the counter. Use a 4.0” wide board stood on
its end to adjust leveling screws/bolts in rail support applications.
Cable Routing. Placement of the scanning-scale should be planned to
allow easy access to other components as well as optimize communication
between the scanner, the POS terminal and the optional Remote Scale
Display. Note that cables may drop straight down from the scanner’s con-
nector panel, or may be conveniently routed along the unit’s side using the
hardware provided. Do not route interface cables near any electrical
motors or other sources of electromagnetic interference.
Remote Scale Display Placement. The customer, and checker in some
instances, must be able to easily view and read the Remote Scale Display.
Ambient light and mounting height considerations are discussed later in
this section.
Vertical Clearance. Provision must be made to allow adequate space
above the scanner bonnet for removal and replacement of the All
Weighs™ Platter (the L-shaped platter). Optimal clearance permits the
platter to be grasped at its top vertical edge and lifted for removal without
obstruction (such as a fixed keyboard mount or any type of enclosure).
Should such an enclosure be unavoidable, an alternate method of platter
removal using two coins may be employed, however a minimum vertical
clearance of 1.5” (3.8 cm) MUST be provided (reference Figure 2-2).
Another consideration is that the scan zone must be kept free of obstruc-
tions such as enclosures, keyboard mounts, etc.

2-6 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Figure 2-2. Vertical Clearance
DO NOT DO NOT
Obstruct Obstruct
L-Platter Scan Zone
Removal

(Keyboard Mount) Allow a minimum


clearance of
1.5" (3.8cm)

(Enclosure)

Ventilation and Spacing


The scanning-scale’s perimeter housing has been designed to provide ade-
quate space for convective cooling and unrestricted movement of the
weighing apparatus. Figure 2-3 shows the debris chutes and ventilation
slots. The checkstand design must allow:
• The ambient air temperature inside the checkstand adjacent to
the scanner must not exceed 104°F (40°C).
• A source of air that provides adequate cooling by convective air
flow.

DO NOT place the scanner in a close-fitting, fully enclosed checkstand. Pro-


vide a MINIMUM of 16 square inches (103.2 square centimeters) of air intake
from below the installation for sufficient convective cooling.
NOTE

Product Reference Guide 2-7


If motors, conveyor belts, or other heat producing equipment are located
near the scanner, forced air ventilation may be required. In most installa-
tions, a 30 cfm (.84 cmm) axial fan should provide sufficient air move-
ment. If a ventilation fan is installed, one with a removable filter that may
be washed or replaced is recommended.
Figure 2-3. Debris Chutes & Ventilation Slots

Debris Chutes/Ventilation Slots

Service Access
The scanner and scanning-scale have been engineered to allow perfor-
mance of all routine service and maintenance (such as “zeroing” and cali-
bration) without removing the scanner from the checkstand. Additionally
all cable connections made at the scanner can be connected and removed
while the unit is sitting on the countertop. The installer should provide
service access to all remaining cable connectors as well as the AC/DC
Power Supply (if installed).

2-8 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Power Installation
Reference the wiring diagram in Figure 2-4 for the recommended fusing
arrangement.

Grounding
The AC/DC Power Supply should have an AC outlet with a clean earth
ground. If you are not sure how to verify the amount of electrical noise
(interference) on the power line, ask a qualified electrician to measure the
input line voltage.
Figure 2-4. Input Power Wiring

On/Off
Switch

Scanner or
Scanner/Scale
AC/DC Power
Supply
Checkstand
Breaker Panel
Neutral
Line On/Off
Ground Switch
Neutral
Line
Ground

Panel
POS Terminal
Ground

Main Neutral
Power Breaker Line
Mains Panel Ground

Inductive Loads
Earth (e.g. Conveyor Belts, Motors, etc)
Panel Ground
Ground Lighting

Product Reference Guide 2-9


Checkstand Preparation
Reference Figure 2-5. When performing a first time installation into a
new checkstand, verify before cutting that room will be allowed for
cabling and the AC/DC Power Supply. When making the opening, take
extra care to accurately cut to the correct dimensions. Mounting may
require installation of support(s), countertop routing, or other such
devices. Depending upon checkstand design, you may wish to install an
item diverter to direct items toward the scan window. See the instructions
in this manual titled “Counter Cutout” for more details concerning the
location and preparation of the opening.
Figure 2-5. Installation Overview

Counter Cutout
Item
Diverter

AC/DC
Power Routed
Cabling Supply Support
Lip

Support Rails

Liquid Spills and Moisture


Select a checkstand design which allows fluids to flow through, and directs
liquids away from any electronic equipment or storage areas.

2-10 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Counter Cutout
The most important consideration when planning the counter opening
for the scanner is the operator’s comfortable reaching distance. The ideal,
ergonomically sound installation allows items to be directed within easy
reach, and a scanning area requiring no lifting or special orientation of
items. If you haven’t already read the information at the beginning of this
section titled, Pre-Installation Considerations, please do so before continu-
ing these instructions.
The symmetrical design of the scanner permits the operator to easily pass
items from one hand to the other while scanning (either from right-to-left
or left-to-right). With the unique 360- scan zone, scanning is accom-
plished in one fluid motion. The operator simply slides the item from the
conveyor belt or diverter area through the scanning area and passes the
item to the other hand, which in turn bags it or places it on a take-away
conveyor belt. Movement should flow naturally over the surface of the
scanner.
Note that the following guidelines for preparing an existing checkstand to
accept a scanner, or incorporating the unit into a new checkstand design
will not be accurate for all installations. Although these guidelines will suf-
fice for most standard installations, the installer may need to make adjust-
ments for varying counter heights and thicknesses, support design, or
other checkstand limitations.
Figure 2-6 shows a typical “left-hand-take-away” checkstand design.
Follow these basic steps to install the unit:
1. Select a position for the scanner that offers a smooth product flow
which best accommodates the reaching distance of the average
operator.
2. Cut the opening in the countertop. Select the appropriate draw-
ing from Figure 2-7, Figure 2-8, or Figure 2-9 for your model.
3. Install the AC/DC Power Supply, the Remote Scale Display cable
and the interface cable(s) observing the following:
Interface cables (and display cable, if applicable) should be
routed away from all highly inductive electrical devices, like
motors and conveyor belts, and even away from the unit’s
power cable if possible.

Product Reference Guide 2-11


Cables should be easy to remove in the event that replace-
ment is required. A little planning now will save a lot of frus-
tration later.
4. Connect and verify all system operations.
The scanner should be installed so that leading and trailing edges of the
All Weighs™ Platter are flush with the countertop to enhance smooth,
slide-through scanning (reference the insert in Figure 2-6). Keep in mind
that the debris chutes on both sides of the platter provide the necessary
clearance for proper scale operation if you are installing a scanning-scale
(you won’t need to provide an additional gap for that).

2-12 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Figure 2-6. Typical Checkstand Design & Cutout Location

Remote Display
Conveyor

POS Terminal
& Printer
Optional
Item Diverter

Deadplate
6.3"
(16.0cm) Scanner

Keyboard
Cash Drawer
(Below Scanner)

Scan & Bag


Well
(Optional)

Check
Writing
Stand Flush — Correct
(Optional) Take-Away
Belt

Bagging
Area Above Flush — Incorrect

Below Flush — Incorrect

Product Reference Guide 2-13


Refer to the appropriate drawing (Figure 2-7, Figure 2-8, or Figure 2-9)
for dimensional information concerning the model you’ll be installing.
Figure 2-7. Model 8100/8200 (Short Scanner) Cutout Dimensions
5.3"
Models 8100/8200 (13.46cm) Window

Dimensions 4.375"
(11.11cm) 5.1" (12.95cm)
9.1"
(23.1cm)

4.125" ±.062 (10.5cm)

13.88"
(35.26cm)

12.9 lb. 11.1" 11.5"


(5.85kg) (28.19cm) (29.21cm)
PLATTER SCANNER
9.05"
Scanner (23.0cm)
Weight PLATTER
8.57"
(21.77cm)

Models 8100/8200
Max. Radius = 0.25"
Cutout (0.635cm) 4x
14.0"
(35.56cm)
11.625"
(29.53cm)

Models 8100/8200
4.125" ±.062 (10.5cm)
Supports

Liquid
Liquid Drainage
Drainage
Support Rails

2-14 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Figure 2-8. Model 8101, 8201, 8102 and 8202 (Medium Scanner or
Scanner/Scale) Cutout Dimensions
Models 8101/8201 Window
& Models 8102/8202 6.2" 5.1"
Dimensions 9.1" (15.75cm) (12.95cm)
(23.1cm)

4.125" ± .062 (10.5cm)

15.7"
(39.88cm)

13.2 lb. 18.0 lb.


11.5"
(6.00kg) (8.16kg) 11.1" (29.21cm)
(28.19cm) SCANNER/
PLATTER SCALE
10.65"
Scanner Scanner/Scale (27.1cm)
Weight Weight PLATTER
10.4"
5.3" (26.42cm)
(13.46cm)

Models 8101/8201
& Models 8102/8202
Max. Radius = 0.25"
Cutout (0.635cm) 4x
15.825"
(40.195cm)
11.625"
(29.53cm)

Models 8101/8201
& Models 8102/8202 4.125" ± .062 (10.5cm)
Supports

Liquid
Liquid Drainage
Drainage
Support Rails

Product Reference Guide 2-15


Figure 2-9. Models 8103, 8203, 8104 and 8204 Long Scanner or Scanner/
Scale Cutout Dimensions
1.16" (2.95cm)
5.3"
Models 8103/8203 0.375" (0.953cm) (13.46cm) Window
& Models 8104/8204
9.35"
Dimensions (23.75cm) 5.1"
(12.95cm)
9.1" 0.375" (0.953cm)
(23.1cm)

4.125" ± .062
(10.5cm)

1.93" (4.9cm) 1.0"


(2.54cm)

20.0 lb. 15.2 lb.


11.5" 11.1"
(9.07kg) (6.89kg) (29.21cm) (28.19cm)
SCANNER/SCALE PLATTER

Scanner/Scale Scanner 12.60"


Weight Weight (32.0cm)
PLATTER

6.46" 13.54"
(16.41cm) (34.39cm)
20.0"
(50.8cm)

Max. Radius = 0.25"


Models 8103/8203 20.125"
(0.635cm) 4x
& Models 8104/8204 (51.12cm)
Cutout Rails

11.625"
0.75" (29.53cm)
(1.905cm)
0.75"
(1.905cm)
18.625"
(47.308cm)

Models 8103/8203
& Models 8104/8204 20.125" ±0.06"
(51.2 ±0.15 cm)
1.5"
Routed Supports 0.75" 0.375" ± 0.03" (.95 ±.08 cm) (3.8 cm)
(1.9 cm)

0.75"±0.125"
0.75"±0.125"
(1.9 ±0.32 cm)
(1.9 ±0.32 cm) 18.625" ±0.125"
4.0" Liquid (47.3 ±0.32 cm) Liquid
Drainage Drainage
(10.2 cm)

2-16 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Checkstand Mounting
There are a number of things to take into account when installing the unit
into a checkstand. Key factors are ergonomic/worker safety, loading capac-
ity and stability. Consider the scanner or scanning-scale’s weight when cal-
culating the robustness of construction needed to support it as well as
maximum capacity of weighed and scanned items.

If you choose to rout a countertop with a thickness of 0.75” (1.9 cm) plywood,
you’ll need to add a backing strip that supports the area routed out for the
support flanges (see Figure 2-5). This support strip should minimally be
made of 0.75” (1.9 cm) thick plywood and be approximately 4.0” (10.2 cm)
NOTE wide and 14.0” (35.6 cm) long. This strip should be glued as well as screwed
to the underside of the countertop.

Installation Overview
The preceding Site Preparation Overview dealt with installed location and
counter preparations to accommodate the scanner or scanning-scale. Hav-
ing completed those steps, physical installation of the scanner or scanning-
scale can begin. The following instructions apply to all models.
This section describes:
1. Unpacking the unit.
2. Verifying operation before connecting to a POS system.
3. Routing and connecting cables.
4. Validating that your scanner communication parameters match
the POS terminal’s system requirements.
5. Functional testing to verify operation when connected to the
POS system.
The following text describes each of these steps.

Unpacking
To unpack the unit:
• Inspect the package for signs of damage that may have occurred
during shipping. If damage is found, report it to your carrier
immediately.

Product Reference Guide 2-17


• Lift out the accessory box containing the AC/DC Power Supply,
optional Remote Scale Display and cable (if present), and the
Quick Reference Guide.
• Remove the Quick Reference Guide and familiarize yourself with
the unit’s controls and features. Leave the guide at the checkstand
when the installation is complete.
• Remove the protective packing and carefully lift the unit from the
carton. Be sure to save the box and all packing material. In the
event of failure, the unit must be returned to the factory in its
original packaging.
• Carefully lift off the All Weighs™ Platter as shown in
Figure 2-19 and remove the protective foam pieces securing the
weigh mechanism. Set the platter back in place.

For added protection during shipment, the All Weighs™ Platter is covered
with a tight-fitting layer of vinyl as shown in Figure 2-10. This vinyl layer
MUST BE REMOVED before placing the unit into service.
NOTE
Figure 2-10. Remove Protective Vinyl

Protective vinyl
MUST be removed
from the
platter
before use.

• Proceed to the Operational Verification instructions below.

2-18 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Operational Verification
Follow these steps to ensure that your unit has arrived undamaged and is
fully functional before installing it in the counter and connecting it to
your POS system.
1. If the unit is a scanning-scale, connect the Remote Scale Display
to the proper connector on the unit’s connector panel (refer to
Figure 2-17). Note that if the Remote Scale Display is not con-
nected, a scanner power-up Selftest will sound a long, low beep,
and the number “8” will appear on the 7-segment display indicat-
ing a remote display error. Power-down, connect a known-good
Remote Display to the appropriate port, and restart to correct this
problem. Alternatively, you can disable the Remote Display using
programming bar codes (see Section 6, Programming for more
information).
2. Connect the power cable at the scanner then at the AC outlet.
When power is applied to the unit, the normal indicator sequence is:
• The green light will be lit (dim) steadily.
• If the Selftest detects a problem, the 7-segment display will dis-
play a number code. Refer to Section 4, Problem Isolation, for a
description of failure codes and problem isolation procedures.

Scale calibration may be necessary to obtain a zero reading on the display


on rare occasions.
NOTE
3. The unit should be permitted to reach thermal equilibrium
before proceeding to the next steps. (Reference the topic Warm-
Up Time in Section 1.) When the unit is moved from a cooler
temperature (such as a storage area) to a warmer environment
(such as a checkstand location), a period of 60 minutes must be
allowed to acclimate the unit to ambient conditions. Once
installed and powered up, a “power-up” warm-up period of 15
minutes must be allowed before calibrating or performing weigh-
ing operations. These two warm-up periods may run concur-
rently.

Product Reference Guide 2-19


4. Verify that the scanner or scanning-scale passes an operational test
by observing the following:
Scanner. Pass UPC/EAN bar code labels in front of the scanner’s win-
dows. Since the interface cable is not yet connected to the POS
terminal, the scanner may be limited to reading only one or two
labels (see the note that follows). The scanner indicates when each
label has been successfully read by flashing the green scanner light
and emitting a good read tone (beep).

When not connected to the host, the scanner may be limited to reading only
one or two labels. (This limitation is dependent upon the interface type.) To
scan multiple labels without connecting to the host, place the unit in Scanner
NOTE Diagnostic Mode by pressing the Volume/Tone Push Button for four seconds.

Scale. If the Zero lamp is not lit, press the Scale Zero Push Button
momentarily. If the scale is operating correctly, the yellow LED
will illuminate and remain on steady, and the display will show a
reading of 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for metric). If the display is blank or
a is displayed, it may be necessary to calibrate the scale
before continuing. Refer to Section 5, Calibration, for calibration
procedures.
Remote Scale Display. Check to verify that 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for met-
ric) is displayed, then place an item on the weighing platter. Ver-
ify that the display shows a weight and that the yellow LED goes
out. Remove the item and observe that Remote Scale Display
shows 0.00 lb (0.000 kg for metric) and that the yellow LED is
On.
5. Unplug the AC power cord from the outlet and disconnect the
power cord and Remote Scale Display cable from the scanner’s
connector panel.
After you have verified that the scanner and scale (if present) are com-
pletely functional, continue with the following procedures to complete the
installation.

2-20 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Diagnostic Modes
Two diagnostic modes are available which allow you to initiate scanner or
scale diagnostic tests, as well as verify the scanner’s ability to read bar
codes.

Scanner Diagnostic Mode


While in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, continuous scanning of labels is
allowed, permitting the user to scan an unlimited number of bar codes
while troubleshooting problems. Under normal operation, the scanner
stores label data, awaiting the signal which transmits it to the host. When
the scanner is not connected to a host, it may read and store only up to
two labels, then quit reading until power is cycled (clearing the memory).
Scanner Diagnostic Mode removes this limitation.
To place the scanner in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, press the Volume/Tone
Push Button for approximately four seconds. While pressing the button,
the scanner will first sound three tones, wait a few seconds, then sound six
rapid tones; after which you should immediately release the button.
While in Scanner Diagnostic Mode, identification numbers for interface1
type, firmware and configuration will scroll continually across the scan-
ner’s 7-segment FRU (Field Replaceable Unit) display. This is useful infor-
mation for field diagnostics. See Figure 4-1 for the location of the display.
For example, if the dual cable RS-232 interface (type 05) were enabled,
the firmware designation was R96-1234, and the configuration was R96-
5593, the following would be shown (slowly, with blanking between each
of the items):
IF-05 r96-1234 r96-5593.
To exit Scanner Diagnostic Mode, cycle power to the unit or press and
hold the Volume/Tone Push Button for eight seconds to reset the scanner.
See the topic, Scanner and Scale Reset in Section 3 for more information
about unit resets.

1. A listing of scanner interface identification numbers is available in Section 6, under the topic,
Interface Type.

Product Reference Guide 2-21


Scale Diagnostic Mode
To enter Scale Diagnostic Mode, press the Scale Zero Push Button for
approximately four seconds. Six rapid tones will be sounded, indicating
the unit is leaving normal operation and entering Scale Diagnostic Mode.
The Remote Display will flash a ‘1’ across the display while the dignostic
routine is being run. When diagnostics are completed successfully, the dis-
play will indicate...
• that the unit has passed the diagnostic test by displaying
PASS .
• a visual verification of display function in that all segments will be
displayed in the form of: -18.8.88
c XXX .

• the number of times the scale has been zeroed (represented by x),
as in Zero XXXX .
• a listing of how many times the unit has been calibrated and
zeroed in the form of: c XXX where x equals the number of
times the scale has been calibrated.
If the diagnostics routine is not completed successfully, the scanner will
sound a series of tones and the Remote Display will show an error code.
Turn to Section 4, Problem Isolation for a description of error codes.
Press the Scale Zero Push Button once more to reset the unit and exit
Scale Diagnostic Mode. See the topic, Scanner and Scale Reset in Section 3
for more information about unit resets.

Cables & Connections


Considerations when routing the power and interface cables for the scan-
ner and scanning-scale are:
• Ensure that cables are not pinched, kinked or pierced.
• Do not route interface cables in close proximity to electrical
motors or other sources of electromagnetic interference.
• Cables can drop directly from their connectors on the scanner, or,
alternatively, can be routed along the scanner’s side to the back
(see Figure 2-11).

2-22 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Do not plug the AC power cord into the outlet at this time. It is a good
practice to always connect the power cable to the scanner first before plug-
ging it into the AC receptacle. The procedures titled, Set-Up, provided
later in this section will instruct you to connect the power cord at that
time. Figure 2-11 illustrates the basic cable routing scheme.
Figure 2-11. Cable Routing

POS Terminal, Printer &


Remote Cash Drawer
Keyboard Display
Alternate
Cable
Routing

AC Power Scanner
Switch Remote Scale
(recommended) Display Cable Scanner
(optional Interface
Scanner/Scale) Cable
AC/DC
Power Scale
Supply Interface
Cable
(Scanner/Scale)

Product Reference Guide 2-23


Figure 2-12 provides physical dimensions for the AC/DC Adapter (part
number 8-0582).
Figure 2-12. Maximum Physical Measurements: AC/DC Adapter

2.3"
1"
(5.8 cm) 5.5 )
c m
3.1" (14
(7.8 cm
)

Remote Scale Display Placement/Installation


When installing the optional Remote Scale Display, consider both the cus-
tomer’s viewing angle and the amount of daily ambient light conditions
anticipated at this installation site. Figure 2-13 shows available adjustment
for the display head.

Lighting Considerations
The display will be easily readable unless placed in direct sunlight or other
very strong light sources. Light interference will not be a factor in most
installations.

2-24 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Viewing Angle
The optimum viewing angle is directly facing the customer. To ensure that
the display is easily readable for the majority of your customers, the dis-
play should be approximately 48 to 60” (122 to 152 cm) from the floor.

Check with local Weights and Measures authorities regarding proper posi-
tioning of scale displays used in retail trade.
NOTE
Figure 2-13. Remote Scale Display

0.00 lb
CAPACITY / CAPACITE - 30 X .01 lb / 15 x .005 kg

40˚ 40˚

25˚ 25˚

Product Reference Guide 2-25


The connector at the Remote Scale Display end is secured with a rubber
band during shipping to prevent damage to the “locking tabs” (see
Figure 2-15). After routing the cable, remove this rubber band before the
cable end connecting to the Remote Scale Display head. Failure to remove
NOTE the band will keep the connector from latching properly when it is connected
to Remote Scale Display port.

Placing and Installing the Remote Scale Display


(Short Pedestal Base ONLY)
1. Determine where you want to install the Remote Scale Display
based on your counter design, the viewing angle and lighting con-
siderations discussed previously. Reference Figure 2-14 for the
display’s physical dimensions.
2. Use the short pedestal base template provided in Figure 2-16 to
mark locations of the mounting screw and cable routing holes.
The mounting screw holes are on 3 3/8” (8.57 cm) centers.

Before drilling, ensure the holes in your base match with the holes indicated
on the template.
NOTE
3. The cable can either be routed through a 3/4” (19 mm) diameter
hole directly under the mounting base or through the cutout in
the back of the base (see Figure 2-15).
4. Drill the mounting screw holes using a drill bit of the appropriate
diameter for your mounting screws or bolts.
5. Drill the cable routing hole using a 3/4” (19 mm) drill bit
(optional).
It may be necessary to shorten the stalk that supports the display head so
that the display is installed at eye level.

2-26 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Figure 2-14. Physical Measurements: Remote Display (Short Base)

5.6"
14.2 cm

2.75"
0.00 lb
CAPACITY / CAPACITE - 30 X .01 lb / 15 x .005 kg
7.0 cm

0"
1. cm
5
Minimum 2.
5.3"
(13.5 cm)
Maximum
11.5"
(29.2 cm)

3.375"
0.953 cm 5"
1. cm
8
3.

4.5"
31.6 cm

6. Cut the stalk to fit your installation (if required).


7. Route the cable through the base/stalk so that you can plug the
connector into the display head.
8. Remove the rubber band from the connector and attach the con-
nector to the display head.
9. Slip the display head onto the stalk/base.
10. Feed the entire remaining length of the Remote Scale Display
interface cable through the cable routing hole so that the assem-
bled Remote Scale Display can be positioned over the mounting
screw holes.
11. Install mounting screws or bolts to complete the installation of
the Remote Scale Display. Take care not to pinch or pierce the
interface cable while securing the Remote Scale Display to the
checkstand.

Product Reference Guide 2-27


Figure 2-15. Remote Scale Display Components.

Display Head Mounting


Example

(29cm)
11.5"
(61cm)
24"
Display Stalk Cable end
after
rubberband

(122 - 152cm)
is removed.

48 - 60"
Cable
Connector

(91cm)
36"
Display Base

(optional Interface
cable
routing) Cable

Figure 2-16. Remote Scale Short Base Display Mounting Template

4 1/2" (11.4 cm)


3 3/8" (8.57 cm)
(3.8 cm)
1 1/2"

3/4"
(1.9 cm)
FRONT

2-28 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Changing Weighing Modes
Your scanning-scale has been programmed for weighing in either pounds
or kilograms depending upon the initial operating environment that was
specified when you ordered your scanning-scale. If you need to change
from pounds to kilograms or vice-versa, call technical support.
You can verify that the scale is set correctly for your country’s requirements
by observing that the Remote Scale Display shows the appropriate mea-
surement symbol (lb or kg) when the power-up Selftest is completed.

LEGAL NOTE Any time the scale weighing mode is changed, the scale must be
re-calibrated before commercial use.

Set-Up & Installation


These setup and installation procedures assume that you have already pre-
pared your checkstand to receive the scanner or scanning-scale. If you have
not already made the counter cutout and routed power and interface
cables, do so now as described in the previous instructions. If your check-
stand has been prepared, proceed as follows:

Set-up
1. Place the unit on the checkstand next to the counter cutout.
2. Route the cables up through the cutout and connect the scanner
and scale interface cable(s), and Remote Scale Display cable
(optional) to the scanner. Some POS terminals require two inter-
face cables; one for the scanner interface and one for the scale
interface. Refer to Figure 2-17 for cable connection locations.
If you have a scanner with no scale, there will be only one interface cable
to the POS terminal.
3. Connect the power cord to the scanner and route the other end
down through the checkstand to the AC power outlet. DO NOT
plug the power cord in at this time.

Product Reference Guide 2-29


4. OPTIONAL — Route your EAS antenna cable down through
the checkstand cutout. (Reference your EAS controller’s set-up
instructions for proper EAS antenna installation.)
Figure 2-17. Connecting Cables to the Scanner/Scale

0.00

Aux. Port Remote Display Power Scale Host POS Terminal EAS Interlock

AUXILIARY PORT REMOTE DISPLAY POWER SCALE SCALE HOST POS TERMINAL EAS INTERLOCK
· Test Port Drives Remote Display AC Brick Input Factory Connected Scale Data (dual · Label Data · Provides Good Read
· On Screen OR cable scanner/scale) · Scale Data (for output to enable EAS
Programming (OSP) Power off Terminal single cable interfaces) antenna RF output
· Application Download (POT) Brick Input · Application Download · Provides signal to
· RS-232 Handheld (where appropriate) drive external speaker
Scanner Input
· Auxiliary RS-232
Label Data Output

Connection to Models with scale Dual cable units only. Connection to


this port is only (Scale connection may this port is
Optional be handled through Optional
POS Terminal port)

Figure 2-18. Connecting the Optional EAS Interlock Cable

EAS
Interlock
Connection

2-30 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Installation
1. Make sure that all cables are firmly attached (except that the AC/
DC power supply should not be connected to the AC outlet yet).
2. Remove the All-Weighs™ platter to gain access to the lift han-
dles. Simply grasp the top edge of the platter, tilt slightly and lift
off vertically (see Figure 2-19a). If the top edge is blocked, insert a
coin into one or both indentations along either side of the platter
and pry gently to lift the platter edge. Grasp the raised sides and
carefully lift the platter off as shown in Figure 2-19b.
Figure 2-19. Removing the All Weighs™ Platter

a (Obstruction)

Coin

b
3. Rotate the lift handles to the vertical position and pick the unit
up using fingers hooked into both handles. Tip: To keep the unit
level during installation, spread the remaining fingers to steady
the unit as shown in Figure 2-20b. DO NOT attempt to lift the
unit using the plastic edges, scale frame, or any features other
than the lift handles.
4. Lower the unit into the counter opening, ensuring that none of
the cables are pinched, pierced or crimped.

Product Reference Guide 2-31


5. Re-install the All Weighs™ Platter and verify that it is flush or
just below flush with the countertop. This is necessary to provide
smooth scanning from either direction. Make adjustments as
needed to align the platter with the counter by moving support
rails up or down, or consider installing screws in positions that
will allow their use in adjusting the unit’s position.

Failure to install a scanning-scale in a stable and level position will inhibit


weighing, calibration and zeroing operations. The platter MUST make unob-
structed contact with all of its supports for proper weighing operation.
NOTE
6. Once installation is complete, proceed with the Operational Veri-
fication procedures on page 19.
Figure 2-20. Using the Lift Handles

2-32 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


System Power-Up Recap
The System Power-Up procedure may vary depending upon the require-
ments of your POS system. It is generally a good practice to power-down
(switch off ) all equipment prior to connecting cables. Check with your
System Supervisor and/or refer to your POS terminal manual for proper
power-down and power-up procedures and interface requirements when
connecting any peripheral device.
If you have not identified any specific requirements for your POS system,
follow these steps.
1. Power-down the POS terminal.
2. Ensure that power is disconnected from the scanner.
3. Connect the scanner and scale interface cables to your POS ter-
minal. This connection may use one or two cables depending
upon your POS terminal interface.
4. Connect the Remote Display cable if your model is a scanning-
scale and make any connections to optional equipment, such as
EAS or a handheld scanner.
5. Power-up the scanner or scanning-scale by connecting the power
cord to an AC power outlet. Wait for the unit to complete the
Selftest routine (10 seconds maximum).
6. Power-up the POS terminal.
7. Verify that both scanning and weighing data are properly com-
municated between the scanner and your POS system. (Weigh
and scan a few items.) If problems are encountered, refer to
Section 4, Problem Isolation.
8. You have now completed installation and system integration of
the scanner or scanning-scale. At this point, the scale must be cal-
ibrated and certified in accordance with the requirements of your
state and/or local requirements. Refer to Section 5, Calibration,
for calibration procedures.

Product Reference Guide 2-33


NOTES

2-34 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Section 3
Operation and Maintenance
The information contained in this section describes how to operate and
maintain the scanner and scale. Topics include “how to’s” on scanning,
weighing, re-zeroing the scale, removing the top cover and cleaning the
upper and lower windows.

Scanning Items
To scan items using the scanner, slide or push them through the scan zone
as shown on this page. The scanner will work equally well with either a
left-to-right or right-to-left motion through the scan zone. There is rarely
a need to reorient an item’s bar code since the scanner can “see” the left,
right, front and back side, as well as the bottom of an item.

“Limited Scanning Mode” is entered by default by interfaces such as USB and


IBM until a Point Of Sale (POS) terminal enables scanning. Labels are “chirped”
while in this mode.
NOTE

Figure 3-1. Scan Zone

Vertical Window Note that eyes...


Scan Zone
Horizontal
Window Indicate what the
Scan Zone scanner “sees.”

Cashier Side
Scan Zone

Product Reference Guide 3-1


Proper Scanning Technique
The scanner was designed to provide the ultimate in ergonomic enhance-
ments for Point-Of-Sale (POS) scanning. To take advantage of these
advancements:
Practice the techniques below to improve scanning efficiency:
• Move the product across the horizontal window (See Figure 3-1).
• Since the scanner reads labels on all four sides plus the bottom,
don’t favor either the horizontal or vertical scan windows. Keep
items in their natural orientation.
• Remember to slide or push items rather than picking them up. By
avoiding any gripping, twisting and rotation of your hands and
wrists, you can prevent repetitive motion injuries. This technique
also relieves you from lifting possibly thousands of pounds per
day.
• Develop a smooth fluid motion during scanning, sharing work
equally between hands.
• Use the entire hand for grasping and sliding items.
• Develop efficient scanning motions, not necessarily faster hand
movements.
• Learn typical locations for bar codes on packages; avoid “flipping”
or rotating the items during scanning.
• Learn how the scanner functions and where the scanning area is
located.
• Avoid covering any portion of the bar code with your hand.

3-2 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Proper Weighing Technique
1. The L-shaped All-Weighs™ platter allows you to place items
anywhere on its surface, including leaning against its vertical sec-
tion, to be weighed accurately. (Reference Figure 3-2.)

It is important that items rest entirely on the platter for their full weight to be
accurately recorded.
NOTE
Figure 3-2. L-Shaped Platter & Item Placement

L-Platter

2. Once weighed items are in place, enter PLU (price Look-Up) data
as described in your POS system instructions. Item weight is dis-
played on the Remote Display and/or the host display.
3. Remove the item from the weigh platter.

Product Reference Guide 3-3


Operational Controls
The function of scanner and scale controls and indicators is listed in
Appendix A, LED/Beeper Indications & Controls. Turn to that appendix for
full details.
Operational Modes
The scanner or scanner/scale features a number of modes that are impor-
tant to both the user and the system support personnel. These modes can
be combined into three groups: pre-operational, operational; and addi-
tional functions. The following text describes these modes, what they
mean, and how and when they are seen.

Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation


Pre-Operation describes those steps that must be successfully completed
before the scanner sounds the initial good read tone and illuminates the
lamps indicating the scanner and/or scale are ready for operation. These
steps include Power-Up Selftest, Error Reporting, and Operational Con-
figuration.

Power-Up/Selftest
Power-Up Selftest begins when power is applied. The scanner’s software
immediately begins the testing sequence to verify that all systems are func-
tioning properly. This routine, which only takes a few seconds, checks all
the functions of the scanner, scale, remote scale display and interface prior
to indicating that it is ready for operation.

A tone indicating Selftest is complete is a configurable feature. See the topic


Power-up Beep Control in the Programming section of this manual.
NOTE

3-4 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Error Reporting
If a fatal error is detected during Selftest or operation, the unit will not
advance to Normal Operation Mode. Selftest diagnostics will cause the
unit to sound a long, low tone and/or display an error message on the 7-
segment display (see Figure 4-1) indicating where the failure occurred.
These messages are coded to assist the repair technician in identifying the
failed component. If an error is indicated, make note of it and contact
your supervisor or technical support representative. A table containing
descriptions of these error codes is included in Section 4, Problem Isolation
on page 4.
If a non-fatal1 error is detected (such as the loss of one of the two lasers),
the unit will sound a long, low tone and display a number on the 7-seg-
ment display. The unit will advance to Normal Operating Mode, but per-
formance may be affected until a correction or repair is made.

Operational Configuration
Once Selftest diagnostics have been successfully run, a tone is emitted (if
configured to do so, and the unit enters an operational configuration state.
The scanner or scanner/scale will automatically load your specific interface
settings which are required to communicate with the host system. There
are two conditions that must be met before the unit can enter Operating
Mode:
• No bar code label can be in the scan volume while the unit is in
this state. Progress is halted until the label has been removed,
thereby ensuring that no extraneous bar code data is sent to the
host.
• If your scanner has a scale, the scale cannot be in motion (usually
caused by excessive vibration in the checkstand) for this test to
succeed. A “Scale in Motion” status will be indicated by display-
ing a period and the applicable weight unit (lb . lb or
kg . kg ) that is selected.

• The scale must be able to “capture” zero weight. The


-0- display will be seen if there is a weight on the platter
at power-up. Removing the weight or pressing the Scale Zero
Push Button should allow the scale to find zero.

1. Scanner behavior under non-fatal error conditions is configurable. See Section 6, Programming
for more details.

Product Reference Guide 3-5


• When the scanner or scanner/scale completes its Selftest success-
fully, it emits a power-up tone (when configured to do so) and
enters Operating Mode.

Operating Mode
Operating Mode includes Normal Operation (scanning and weighing)
and Sleep Mode. These two modes are most commonly observed by the
user/operator.

Normal Operation
This condition is indicated by the green light being on dim and steady.
For scanner/scale models, the yellow light indicates that the scale senses a
weight of zero on the platter. If you have a scanner without scale model,
the yellow lamp will not be lit when the scanner is ready for scanning.

Yellow and Green LED indications are configurable. Your scanner may not be pro-
grammed to operate in the standard manner described above.
NOTE
Once the scanner enters Normal Operation, it begins a countdown
sequence. If there is no activity during a preset period of time (also called
timeout1), the unit will shut off the laser and/or motor in order to prolong
the life of the electrical and mechanical components. Once the scanner has
timed out, it enters Sleep Mode.

Sleep Mode
After the scanner has been left idle for a preset period of time, the laser
and/or motor automatically turns off (goes to sleep). This state is called
Sleep Mode, and is indicated by a “slow” blink of the green light (blinking
at a 2-second rate). To wake up the unit, press anywhere on the weigh
platter (scanner/scale models only), press the Volume Selection switch,
press the trigger of an attached handheld scanner, or wave your hand in
front of the vertical window. The unit will recognize any of these signals as
a wake-up call and instantly return to Normal Operation.

1. “Timeout” and “Sleep Mode” time delays are programmable features that can be selected through
use of the programming labels included in Section 6, Programming.

3-6 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Additional Functions
Additional scanner and scale functions include programming, running
scanner or scale diagnostics, initiating a reset, zeroing the scale, and cali-
brating the scale.

Programming
When your scanner or scanner/scale is shipped from the factory it is con-
figured to work with the POS system interface at your store and read the
bar code symbologies you designated. If you need to change this configu-
ration information for any reason, Section 6, Programming, contains spe-
cial bar code labels for changing the unit’s settings.

Diagnostic Mode
Refer to Section 2, Diagnostic Modes for details about running scanner and
scale diagnostics. Error Codes and Corrective Action in Section 4 provides a
table of error codes resulting from diagnostics.

Scanner and Scale Reset


The reset procedures and indicators are identical for scanner and scanner/
scale models. As with any electronic equipment, it is sometimes necessary
to reset the electronics. The reset procedure allows you to initiate a reset
command to the scanner. This may be necessary if the POS terminal has
been switched off or the store system has been reset while the unit is on.
Reset can also be used to initiate and run the unit’s internal Selftest rou-
tine.
Pressing and holding the Volume/Tone Push Button for approximately ten
seconds initiates a reset, which is sounded by a rapid number of beeps. If
the motor had been spinning, the lamps will blink while the motor spins
down. At that point, the motor will spin back up and the scanner will con-
tinue to run the Selftest diagnostics. For more information, see the topic,
Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation earlier in this section.

Product Reference Guide 3-7


Scale Adjustments
The scale allows two user adjustments: zeroing and calibration. The first,
and most frequently performed, is ‘zeroing’ the scale. This operation resets
the scale’s “at rest” reading to zero which must be within the range of - 0.2
pounds (- 1.25 grams) to +0.6 pounds (0.27kg) since the last calibration.
While the ‘at rest’ reading remains within the zero range, the scale will
automatically adjust itself to true zero. The scale also automatically zeros
itself on power-up if the weight present on the scale is within these defined
limits.

Zeroing the Scale


The zeroing operation may be performed by cashiers and other store per-
sonnel. Pressing and releasing the Scale Zero Push Button should return
the scale to Normal Operation. If the zero point moves out of the zero
range due to debris accumulation or other causes, pressing the Scale Zero
Push Button will not reset the zero point. In this case the weigh platter
must be cleaned, debris chutes cleared of debris or the scale must be recal-
ibrated.
With the scanner/scale powered-up and at operating temperature:
1. Remove everything from the weighing surface of the scanner/
scale.
2. Press the Scale Zero Push Button. (See Figure 1-1).
3. The Zero1 light will turn on and the display will show 0.00 lb
(0.000 kg). If it does not, see Section 4, Problem Isolation.
4. You have completed the scale zeroing function.

Calibrating the Scale


The second adjustment, calibration, defines and sets a standard reference
weight range against which all product weights are compared. If your scale
is set for weighing in pounds, this range is 0 - 30 pounds, and, if your scale
is set for weighing in kilograms, the range is 0 - 15 kilograms. The scale
must be calibrated upon initial installation, whenever the scale cannot be
zeroed, when the scale diagnostics indicate a calibration error, when the
weighing measure (pounds or kilograms) is changed, or when the scale
module has been replaced.

1. Zero light operation is configurable.

3-8 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Normally, once the scale has been calibrated, the calibration must be veri-
fied and/or approved by a local regulatory body. In many areas of the
United States, the scale calibration switch must be sealed before being
placed into service. Consult the agency responsible for regulating weigh-
ing devices in your area to ensure that you are meeting all legal and regula-
tory requirements. Section 5, Calibration, describes the calibration
sequence and verification process.
Calibration can only be performed if the tamper seal that secures access to
the Calibration Switch is broken and the switch cover is removed. Break-
ing the seal may legally render the scale inoperable until it has been recerti-
fied and a new seal attached. Consult your local regulations before
removing the calibration seal if you are unsure of the legal requirements.
Although the scale will physically continue to weigh products, a broken
seal may require recertification by a proper authority as designated by your
local laws.

Product Reference Guide 3-9


Operational Maintenance
The scanner or scanner/scale will provide dependable service for many
years. The following maintenance procedures will keep your scanner or
scanner/scale operating at peak performance.
Cleaning the Weigh Platter and Scan Windows. Clean the exterior sur-
faces of the horizontal and vertical scan windows at least twice daily with a
nonabrasive, mild, water-based glass cleaner and paper towels or lint-free
cleaning tissues. The textured plastic surfaces and stainless steel can also be
cleaned using the same cleaning agents.
Cleaning the Air Gap/Debris Chutes & Drip Rail. Daily, clear the
debris chutes (see Figure 2-3) between the platter and the outer housing.
Most items can be cleared from the debris chutes by carefully running a
thin stiff object like a credit card along all sides of the weighing surface. If
necessary, remove the top cover to clear the debris chutes and drip rail.

3-10 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Vertical Scan Window Replacement
The Vertical Scan Window enclosed in the All Weighs™ Platter is a
replaceable part. Follow these instructions to remove and replace the win-
dow:
To remove the Vertical Scan Window:
1. Grasp the top edge of the platter, tilt slightly and lift off vertically
(see Figure 3-3a). If the top edge is blocked, insert a coin into one
or both indentations along either side of the platter and pry gen-
tly to lift the platter edge. Grasp the raised sides and carefully lift
the platter off as shown in Figure 3-3b.
Figure 3-3. Platter Removal

a (Obstruction)

Coin

Use caution to avoid damage to the now exposed horizontal and vertical
scan windows. If cleaning of these windows is necessary, use a nonabrasive,
mild, water-based glass cleaner and paper towels or lint-free cleaning tis-
sues and take care to avoid scratching these windows (damage to the win-
NOTE dows can degrade scanning performance).

Product Reference Guide 3-11


2. The vertical bezel cover is held in place by tabs along its top and
side edges. To remove it, carefully lift up on the top edge as
shown in Figure 3-4a, tilt it out and snap it off.
3. Lift out the vertical window. Carefully dispose of any damaged
glass.
Figure 3-4. Vertical Scan Window Removal/Replacement

a b
4. Fully seat the new vertical scan window into the window channel.
5. Align the vertical bezel cover with the assembly. Press firmly along
the top and sides to engage the tabs and secure it in place.
6. Clean both sides of the new vertical scan window using a paper
towel or lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild, water-
based glass cleaner. DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads.
7. Re-install the platter. Vertical scan window replacement is now
complete.

3-12 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Horizontal Scan Window Replacement (WRG)
Wear Resistant Glass (WRG) horizontal scan windows are replaceable and
can be removed and replaced following the instructions below.

Sapphire glass does not require replacement, so it is permanently fastened


in place. Do not attempt to remove Sapphire glass from the platter.
NOTE
1. Remove the All Weighs™ Platter from the scanner as shown in
Figure 3-3.
2. Turn the platter upside down on a clean, dry surface and remove
the two screws shown in Figure 3-5. Retain the screws for later re-
installation.
3. Once the retainer is freed from the platter, tilt out the retainer
and remove the WRG window as shown. Carefully dispose of any
damaged glass.
4. Seat a new WRG window in the cavity.
5. Re-install the retainer using the original two screws.
6. Clean both sides of the new WRG window using a paper towel or
lint free cleaning tissues dampened with a mild, water-based glass
cleaner. DO NOT use abrasive cleaners or pads.
7. Re-install the platter. WRG window replacement is now com-
plete.

Product Reference Guide 3-13


Figure 3-5. Removing/Replacing the WRG Window

Tilt Slide WRG


Retainer Window Out

3-14 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Section 4
Problem Isolation
In the event of a suspected functional problem, use the troubleshooting
references provided in this section. This useful information will help you
to identify and resolve the cause of the problem.
The scanner/scale has a number of features that indicate when a scanner or
scale problem occurs. The unit may:
• emit a series of tones
• light the 7-segment Field Replaceable Unit (FRU status) display
• flash the Green and/or Yellow LEDs
• display error codes on the Remote Display (if installed)
Three error reporting modes are used: Power-Up Selftest, Operational
tests and Diagnostic tests. These test sequences are explained on the fol-
lowing pages.

Power-Up Selftest
The Power-up Selftest is a pre-operational series of tests that must be suc-
cessfully completed before the scanner indicates readiness for operation.
This pre-operational period is the time between power-up and normal
operation during which the motor comes up-to-speed and software, firm-
ware and hardware are being tested. These tests ensure that all subsystems
are fully functional before turning on the Visible Laser Diode (VLD).
Refer to the Section 3 subsection titled, Operational Modes for a more
detailed description of this and other scanner and scale modes.

Operational Tests
These are the tests that run continually during Normal Operation and
Sleep Mode. Firmware checks all subsystems, accessory connections and
the POS interface to verify everything is operating normally. If a problem
is detected at any time, a long, low tone is sounded, an error code is shown
on the 7-segment display, and operation may be halted. If you press the
Volume/Tone Push Button at that time, a series of tones will be sounded
that matches the error code displayed.

Product Reference Guide 4-1


Diagnostic Tests
See Section 2, Diagnostic Modes, for details about running diagnostic tests
for the scanner and/or scale. If a problem is discovered during diagnostics,
the scanner will provide feedback about the source of the problem. The
remainder of this section describes these failure indications and includes
troubleshooting flowcharts to help isolate the problem.
Diagnostic Procedures
Your Point-Of-Sale (POS) system may contain many components that
operate as a system. Since almost all scanner or scale problems are caused
by either the scanner, scale, POS terminal or communication links
between them, these troubleshooting flowcharts focus on these compo-
nents. Additionally, the optional Remote Scale Display, AC/DC Power
Supply and their cables are potential problems addressed in this section.
The flowcharts provided in this section walk you through a diagnostic
process that will isolate the failed component and instruct as to the correc-
tive action required. Since internal scanner and scale components cannot
be replaced by an operator or installer, most functional errors will require
the assistance of a trained technical support person. However, if the prob-
lem is caused by faulty cable, power supply or remote display, you can fix
the problem by replacing the defective component and complete the
installation.

4-2 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Error Codes
If an error is detected, the scanner will sound a long low tone (for three
seconds) and alternately flash its LEDs, indicating a failure. When this
occurs, press the Volume/Tone Push button to display the error code on
the 7-segment display (refer to Figure 4-1). The scanner will also sound a
series of beeps corresponding to the error code. The table below describes
what these codes mean and what action should be taken for each.

When troubleshooting, always remember to check all cable connections


first before proceeding with other problem isolation steps.

Product Reference Guide 4-3


Table 4-1. Error Codes and Corrective Action

Error
Probable Cause Corrective Action
Code

No POS interface has been selected (Null interface). See the topic,
0
Configuration Interface Type, in Section 6 to select the required interface using
Blinking
programming bar codes.

See Section 6, Programming, for details about configuring the scan-


1 Configuration Error
ner using programming bar codes.

2 Digital Board Unplug unit and call technical support personnel.

3 Motor Unplug unit and call technical support personnel.


4 Laser Call technical support personnel.

5 Laser Call technical support personnel.

6 Digital Board Unplug unit and call technical support personnel.

See the topic Scale Error Reporting in this section for problem
7 Scale
identification and corrective actions.

Connect the Remote Display. If necessary, replace display or cable.


8 Remote Display Alternatively, you can disable the Remote Display using the program-
ming procedures described in Section 6.

A Button Module Call technical support personnel

C Scale Calibration Proceed to Section 5, Calibration

Decimal
3.3 V Present If not lit, call technical support personnel
Point

4-4 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Figure 4-1. 7-Segment LED Display

7-Segment Display

Product Reference Guide 4-5


Scale Error Reporting
Scale diagnostics uses the Remote Scale Display and the Zero Status lamp
to communicate specific scale failures. The following chart shows the
Remote Display messages, the Scale Status lamp indication, the problem
that the scale is experiencing and what action should be taken. When
troubleshooting, always remember to check all cable connections first
before proceeding with other problem isolation steps.

Table 4-2. Scale Error Reporting

Remote Scale Status Problem


Action Required
Display Lamp Description
Check for stable installation. Change
Flash, pause, 1 blink,
Too much motion at power- scale motion filter using the labels
E _1 long pause, repeat
up. found in Section 6; restart. If problem
sequence.
persists, scale may require calibration.
Flash, pause, 2
Call technical support personnel. Re-
E__2 blinks, long pause, Calibration lost.
calibrate; restart; recertify (if required).
repeat sequence.
Flash, pause, 3 Scale communication lost.
Call technical support personnel;
E__3 blinks, long pause, Internal scanner/scale prob-
report error.
repeat sequence. lem.
Flash, pause, 4
Call technical support personnel;
E__4 blinks, long pause, Scale module failure.
report error.
repeat sequence.
Flash, pause, 5
Call technical support personnel;
E__5 blinks, long pause, Internal software fault.
report error.
repeat sequence.

4-6 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Table 4-2. Scale Error Reporting

Remote Scale Status Problem


Action Required
Display Lamp Description
Other Scale Reporting
- Check debris chutes.
Cannot zero at power- up or - Verify that the weigh platter moves
weight remains on scale for freely.
more than 4 minutes or - Remove item(s) from scale
-0- Off
weight has not returned to - Press Scale Zero Push Button for
zero between POS weight more information.
requestsa. - If the scale still fails to zero, recali-
brate the scale.
Over- and underweight con- - Remove all weight from scale
__--- Off
ditions. - Rezero.

a. This is a configurable feature.

Product Reference Guide 4-7


Flowcharts
The problem isolation flowcharts on the following pages allow you to
identify and troubleshoot problems with your system.
Figure 4-2. Problem Isolation: Start
For units using an AC/DC adapter, verify that...
1. AC power cord is connected to a functional AC outlet.
2. IEC connectors are firmly connected.
3. DC power cord is firmly connected to scanner.
If your unit is a model which receives Power Off the
START Terminal POT), verify that the I/F cable is securely
connected at both ends.

Power-up
Scanner power-up is signified by any or
all of the following:
- Facet wheel shows movement Power
Supply
- Lasers turn on
- Status LED(s) turn on
- Speaker sounds tone(s) NO
- Remote display shows message
- A single red dot is visible on the 7- Check these
segment display Does Have you potential problems:
NO checked the YES
the scanner power - AC power cord
Flashing Green LED power-up connections - AC/DC adaptor
If the Green LED is flashing slowly, the ? ? - AC outlet
scanner is most likely in Sleep Mode.
Press and release the Volume/Tone YES
Push Button, wave your hand in front of
the vertical window, or trigger an
attached handheld scanner (if present)
to "wake-up" the scanner. Is the NO Ensure the Green LED is Is the NO
A flashing Green LED can also mean Green LED enabled via pro- Green LED
the scanner has been disabled by the Lit gramming bar codes. Lit
POS terminal. To exit this mode, cycle ? ?
power or have the terminal re-enable
the scanner. YES
YES
Selftest Failure
If the scanner fails its Selftest, the
following takes place:
- Speaker sounds a tone at the lowest
value for approx. 3 seconds. Call Tech Support
- Green and Yellow LEDs flash on and Does
off alternately. the scanner NO Go to Selftest
- 7-segment display shows a code (1 to pass Selftest
C) to indicate the failure. flowchart
?
Consult the Selftest flowchart if you're
unsure the unit has passed Selftest. YES

NO Does the YES Will the NO


Go to Scale scale weigh scanner read Go to Poor/No
flowchart correctly bar codes Reading flowchart
? reliably
?
YES

Other Problems?
Call Tech Support

4-8 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Figure 4-3. Problem Isolation: Selftest
SELFTEST
START

Scan the Factory


Does the Does the YES Defaults bar code to Does the YES
7-segment NO 7-segment 7-segment
enable the default
display show display show configuration file.
display show
0 1. 1.
? ? Restart the unit. ?
NO
YES NO

No interface selected
(Null Interface). Does the
Select an interface. 7-segment YES
display show
2. or 3.
?
NO

Does the YES


7-segment Call Tech Support
display show
4. or 5.
?
NO

Does the YES


7-segment
display show
6., 7. or A.
?
NO

Does the YES


7-segment Go to Remote Display
display show flowchart
This could also be 8.
shown on the Remote ?
Display as -0- or an
error (E__#)

Does the YES


7-segment Go to Scale flowchart
display show
C.
?
NO

Unit passes Selftest

Product Reference Guide 4-9


Figure 4-4. Problem Isolation: Poor/No Reading
Have you verified that
all scan windows are clean
and scratch-free?
POOR/NO READING Before proceeding, verify that
START bar code samples presented
to scanner are of good quality
and a symbology the scanner
Enter Scanner Diagnostic Mode by can read.
holding the Volume/Tone Push
Button for 4 seconds (until first 3,
and then 6 rapid tones are sounded)
then release. Scan a known-good
bar code.

A good read is
signified by one
flash of the Green
LED and a single Does the
beep1. scanner read NO
the bar code Call Tech Support
satisfactorily
?
YES

Reset the scanner by


holding down the
Volume/Tone Push Button
for 8 seconds.

If unexpected data
is being sent from
the host to the
scanner, consider Does the Does the
scanner pass YES YES
enabling the scanner read DONE
programmable the data to satisfactorily
feature Ignore Host the POS ?
Commands to ?
debug the system. NO NO

Go to No Transmit to
POS flowchart Verify programmable
parameters using the
information and programming Does the YES
bar codes provided in Section scanner read DONE
6. Check bar code symbology satisfactorily
options and other configurable ?
features.
NO

Troubleshoot
the host or call
Tech Support.

1 Green and Yellow LEDs and beeper indications are configurable


features. Behavior may vary from that described here.

4-10 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Figure 4-5. Problem Isolation: No Transmit to POS

NO TRANSMIT TO POS
START

Check the interface (I/F) Verify programmable


cable connections. If parameters using the
possible, retest the information and programming Does the
system using a known- bar codes provided in Section YES
scanner read DONE
good I/F cable. 6. Check interface and I/F satisfactorily
options, active symbologies ?
and other configurable
features. NO

Does the
scanner pass NO
Troubleshoot
the data to the host or call
the POS Tech Support.
?
YES

DONE

Product Reference Guide 4-11


Figure 4-6. Problem Isolation: Scale

If this is a new installation,


SCALE START make sure any foam packing
pieces have been removed
from the scale cavity before
View the Remote proceeding. Lift off the platter
Display and/or the to verify, then set the platter Call Tech Support
Yellow scale status LED back into position.
for the scale error code.
Reference the topic, YES
Scale Error Reporting in
Section 4 for more
information. Is Is the
YES NO motion filter
DONE problem
fixed at its maximum
? setting
-0- ?
shown on YES - Check for debris under platter. NO
RemoteDisplay/ - Verify that the weigh platter
Yellow moves freely. Increase the scale
LED off - Remove item(s) from scale. motion filter setting by
? - Press Scale Zero Button 1. Reference Section 6
- If the scale still fails to zero, for more information.
NO recalibrate the scale.
NO
E__1
shown on Problem is too much Is
Remote Display/ YES motion at power-up. problem
YES
Yellow LED Correct excess vibration fixed
DONE
Flash once in counter if possible. ?
?
NO
...or 7-segment
display shows 'C'

NO
E__2
shown on Problem is calibration
Will the
Remote Display/ YES lost. Recalibrate the scale
scale
YES
Yellow LED using the procedures in DONE
Section 5. calibrate
Flash twice ?
?
NO

E__3
shown on Problem is scale Is
YES communication lost. YES
RemoteDisplay/ problem DONE
Yellow LED Flash Verify cable connections fixed
3 times to/from the scale. ?
?
NO NO

E__4 shown on Remote


Display/Yellow LED Flash Call Tech Support
4 times. Problem is Scale
Load Cell failure.

4-12 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Figure 4-7. Problem Isolation: Remote Display

REMOTE DISPLAY Scanner-scale models that include


START a Remote Display when shipped
from the factory, are configured
for use with the display. If you're
unsure of the settings for your
unit, contact Tech Support.

Is the NO Use the programming bar


unit configured codes in Section 6 to
for a Remote enable operation using a
Display Remote Display.
?

YES

Verify that the Remote


Display cable is securely NO Is the YES
attached to the external problem DONE
Remote Display port and fixed
reset the scanner. ?

Re-connect using a
Is the NO known-good Remote Is the YES
problem problem Replace the
Display. Reset the Remote Display
fixed scanner and retest. fixed
? ?

YES NO

DONE Call Tech Support

Product Reference Guide 4-13


NOTES

4-14 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Section 5
Calibration
A number of situations require the scale to be calibrated. They are:
• at initial installation of the scanner/scale
• if the scale cannot be re-zeroed
• if you change the weight measure from pounds to kilograms or
vice-versa
• if diagnostics indicate a calibration error
• the weigh module has been replaced
Follow the procedures on the following pages to ensure that the scanner/
scale will meet Weights and Measurement requirements.

Certification of the scanner/scale’s weighing apparatus is subject to


Federal, State and Local Weights and Measures statutes and is
restricted to authorized government agencies and/or duly registered
agents thereof. Anytime a scale is calibrated, it should be properly
sealed with a lead and wire or paper seal before being placed into ser-
LEGAL NOTE vice.
It is your responsibility to check with the appropriate authorities in your
area to ensure compliance with pertinent regulations before removing
any official seals or placing a newly calibrated scanner/scale into ser-
vice.

Product Reference Guide 5-1


Description of Calibration Sequence
The Calibration Sequence sets the scale to an accurate reference point for
weighing. This process involves the use of a Field Standard Weight Set
(31.5-pounds) for calibration in pounds, (18.5-kilograms) for Metric.
Once calibration has been successfully completed, the scanner/scale uses
the certified weight as a reference for subsequent weighing activities.
These verification procedures follow the U.S. National Institute of Stan-
dards and Technology 44 Handbook guidelines for bench/counter scale
installations.
If any of these tests fail to meet the required weight indications, you must
calibrate the scanner/scale. Refer to the calibration procedures in this sec-
tion for the proper procedures.
You may be required by state and/or local regulations to have procedures
other than these performed by a certified technician or verification offi-
cial.
Access to the calibration switch should be restricted with a paper or a wire
and lead seal after the calibration has been performed if required by your
local regulatory agency.

The Calibration Sequence must be performed without removing the scanner/


scale from its installed position.
NOTE
The following tools and supplies will be required to perform the calibra-
tion process:
• 31.5 pound Field Standard Weight Set1.
(English calibration only).
• 18.5 kilogram Field Standard Weight Set2.
(Metric calibration only).
• Lead/Wire or Paper Seal (as required by law).

1. NOTE: Throughout the calibration procedures, specified weights may be achieved by using a com-
bination of weights from this set. eg. 20 lbs may be made up of one 10.00 lb. weight and two 5.00
lb. weights.
2. NOTE: Throughout the calibration procedures, specific weights may be achieved by using a com-
bination of weights from this set. eg. 10 kgs. may be made up of one 5.00 kg. and five 1.00 kg.
weights.

5-2 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Motion Test
This test verifies that the scale will not ‘zero’ when the weighing surface of
the scanner/scale is in motion.
1. Verify that the Yellow LED1 is on and the Remote Display reads
0.00 pounds or 0.000 kilograms.
2. Press lightly on the weigh platter of the scanner/scale with one
hand and at the same time press and release the Scale Zero Push
Button on the operator’s panel. The Yellow LED should turn Off
and the Remote Display should not display 0.00 pounds or 0.000
kilograms.
3. Remove your hand from the weighing platform and verify that
the Yellow LED is On and the Remote Display reads 0.00 pounds
or 0.000 kilograms.
Automatic Zero Setting Test
This test verifies that the scanner/scale automatic zero setting mechanism
is operating correctly.
1. Place 0.007 pounds (4 grams for metric) on the center of the
weighing platform. The entire weight must be placed on the
weighing platform at once for this test to be valid. The Yellow
LED should go Off and the Remote Display should read 0.01
pounds (0.005 kilograms).

The scanner/scale has an adaptive zero capture mechanism that re-zeros the
scale over time if there is a slow change in the zero level; thus if all the
weight is not placed on the weighing surface at one time, the Yellow LED will
remain On and the Remote Display will read 0.00 pounds (0.000 kilograms).
When the weight is removed, the Yellow LED will turn off and the display will
NOTE show a minus sign . lb . Press the Scale Zero Push Button to re-zero
the scale.

1. Yellow LED indications can be configured via feature programming and may not be enabled for
certain functions.

Product Reference Guide 5-3


Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration
1. Assure that the scanner/scale is stable, secure and properly
installed. (Refer to Section 2, Site Preparation and Installation for
instructions on the proper installation of the scanner/scale).
2. Power-up the scanner/scale.
3. Allow the unit to reach temperature equilibrium for at least one
hour. If the scanner/scale is already at room temperature, allow at
least 15 minutes for acclimatization.
4. Before performing the calibration, the scanner/scale must be pre-
stressed with a weight of more than 30 pounds (15kg). With
power turned on, place the entire weight set (including the case)
on the weighing surface of the scale. The display should show an
underscore and three hyphens , which is the over-
weight indication.
5. Remove all weight from the weighing surface and ensure that
there are no obstructions in the debris chutes of the scanner/scale.
See Figure 5-1.
Calibrating the Scale (Pounds & Kilograms)
1. Before proceeding, ensure that the scanner/scale has been pre-
pared for this process by performing the preceding steps titled,
Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration.
2. Remove the weigh platter and make sure that there are no
obstructions in the debris chutes.
3. Cut and remove the seal that secures the calibration switch access
cover and remove the cover. This seal may not be present if this is
the initial installation of the scanner/scale.
4. Locate the calibration switch (See Figure 5-1).
5. Press and release the Calibration Switch to place the scanner/scale
in Calibration Mode. The scanner/scale will sound a tone indicat-
ing that it is in Calibration Mode. If the motor was spinning
when you initiated Calibration Mode, the motor will stop and
the Yellow LED will begin flashing indicating the scale is in Cali-
bration Mode. The display will show the message “ESCL” (empty
scale).

5-4 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


6. Reinstall the weigh platter.
7. Press the Scale Zero Push Button. The Yellow LED will go out for
approximately 10 seconds (or less) and the Remote Display will
alternately display and until the scale is
ready to proceed.
8. When the scale is ready, the Yellow LED will begin blinking again
and the display will show the message “Ad20 (add twenty
pounds)” or “Ad10 (add ten kilograms).” The scanner/scale will
also sound one tone if the scale is weighing in kilograms or two
tones for pounds. Place the correct weight (twenty pounds for cal-
ibration in pounds, or ten kilograms for metric calibration) from
the Field Standard Weight set on the center of the weighing area
and press the Scale Zero Push Button again.
9. The Yellow LED will extinguish for approximately 10 seconds
and the Remote Display will alternately display and
until the scale is ready to proceed.
10. If the calibration was successful, the speaker sounds a single tone,
the Scale Status LED begins blinking again, and “End-” appears
in the Remote Display.
11. If the calibration was not successful, the speaker will sound five
tones indicating a scale failure, and the Scale Status LED will
blink twice, strobe (fast blinks) and then continually repeat this
sequence until reset. Remove all weight from the Weigh Platter,
and repeat the procedure starting with step 8.
12. Press the Scale Zero Push Button again to permanently store the
calibration data and exit Calibration Mode. You have completed
the calibration of the scanner/scale. The unit’s calibration must
now be verified as required by state and/or local weights and mea-
sures regulations. The verification procedure must be performed
to assure that a scale will pass Weights and Measures requirements
before it is placed into commercial/retail service.

Product Reference Guide 5-5


You have completed the scale calibration procedure. You must now con-
tinue with the calibration verification tests to complete the scale’s calibra-
tion. If you are weighing in pounds, continue with the following
procedures to verify that the scale was successfully calibrated and that it
weighs properly. If you are weighing in kilograms, turn to the instructions
titled, Calibration Verification (Kilograms), later in this section.

5-6 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Figure 5-1. Calibration Control

ZERO
Switch

Calibration
Switch

Debris Chutes

Product Reference Guide 5-7


Calibration Verification (U.S. Pounds)
Once you have completed the calibration sequence, you may be required
to perform these step-by-step verification procedures. These procedures
follow the National Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook-44
guidelines for grocery scale installations. You may be required by state or
local law to have these procedures performed by a certified technician or
verified by a proper official.
These calibration verification procedures cover five different tests:
• Increasing-Load Test
• Shift Test
• Blanking Test
• Decreasing-Load Test
• Return to Zero Test

5-8 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1)
This test checks Scale operation with five, ten and fifteen pound weights.
1. Check that the display reads 0.00 lb. when at rest with nothing
on the weighing surface. (The Yellow LED is steadily lit).
2. Place a five-pound weight on the center of the weighing surface
and check that the display reads 5.00 lb.
3. Place an additional five pounds on the center of the weighing sur-
face and check that the display reads between 9.99 and 10.01 lb.
4. Place an additional five pounds on the center of the weighing sur-
face and check that the display reads between 14.99 and 15.01.
Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.00.
5. You have completed the Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1).

Shift Test
The Shift Test checks to ensure that items placed anywhere on the weigh-
ing surface of the scanner/scale are weighed properly. Refer to Figure 5-2
when performing this test.
1. Place and remove a fifteen-pound load on the center of each of
the four quadrants (A, B, C, and D in Figure 5-2) of the scanner/
scale’s weigh platter in succession. Verify that a reading of
between 14.99 and 15.01 lb registers under load and that the dis-
play returns to 0.00 between each load.
2. After verifying the accuracy of each quadrant of the weighing sur-
face, remove all weight from the scale. You have completed the
Shift Test.

Product Reference Guide 5-9


Figure 5-2. Shift Test

B
A C
A B D
D C

5-10 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2)
After completing the Shift Test, you must complete the Increasing Load
Test using 20.0, 25.0 and 30.0 pounds of weight.

The upper limit of the scale is configurable according to POS interface type
and may not necessarily be set at 30 pounds, which is the standard setting.
For this test, continue to place weights in five pound increments only up to
NOTE the upper weight limit set for your scale.

1. Place 20.0 pounds in the center of the weighing surface and check
that the display reads between 19.99 and 20.01 lb.
2. Place an additional five pounds in the center of the weighing sur-
face, increasing the load to 25.0 pounds and check that the dis-
play reads between 24.99 and 25.01 lb.
3. Place an additional five pounds in the center of the weighing sur-
face increasing the load to 30.0 pounds and check that the display
reads between 29.99 and 30.01 lb.
4. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.00.

Blanking Test
This test ensures that the scanner/scale will indicate its weighing capability
has been exceeded if a weight greater than 0.05 pounds over its maximum
upper weight limit is placed upon the unit.
1. Place weights that total the upper weight limit plus 0.51 pounds
on the scale. For example: If the upper limit is set at 30 pounds,
place weights equaling 30.51 pounds.
2. Verify that the display shows a dash and three hyphens (_ - - -).
This is the overweight indication.

The scanner/scale may blank (show an underscore and three hyphens) at


any weight greater than its upper limit, but must blank when the upper limit
plus 0.51 pounds are set upon the weighing surface.
NOTE

Product Reference Guide 5-11


Decreasing-Load Test
This test ensures that the scanner/scale responds properly when a heavy
object is followed by a significantly smaller object.
1. Place a 30.0-pound load on the scale and verify that the display
shows between 29.99 and 30.01 pounds.

If the upper weight limit for your scale is not set at 30 pounds, begin by plac-
ing weight equaling your upper limit setting.
NOTE
2. Remove weights to leave 20 pounds on the scale. Check that the
display shows between 19.99 and 20.01.
3. Remove another 15.0 pounds from the scale and check that the
scale reads 5.00 lb.
4. You have completed the Decreasing Load Test.

Return to Zero Test


This test ensures that, after all other tests have been completed success-
fully, the scanner/scale returns to zero. Remove all weights from the scale
and verify that the scale reads 0.00 lb.
After completing this test, close the calibration access cover and seal per
local Weights and Measures requirements. This final step must agree with
the legal requirements of your state or local government.
You have completed the calibration and verification process for weighing
in pounds.
If the scanner/scale passes all these tests,
1. Remove the weigh platter, install the calibration switch cover and
install a seal (if required).
2. Reinstall the weigh platter.
If the scanner/scale fails any of these tests, it should be serviced by a quali-
fied technician.

5-12 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Calibration Verification (Kilograms)
Once you have completed the calibration sequence, you may be required
to perform these step-by-step verification procedures. These procedures
follow the National Institute of Standards and Technology Handbook-44
guidelines for grocery scale installations. You may be required by state or
local law to have these procedures performed by a certified technician or
verified by a proper official.
These calibration verification procedures cover five different tests:
• Increasing-Load Test
• Shift Test
• Blanking Test
• Decreasing-Load Test
• Return to Zero Test

Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1)


This test checks Scale operation for increasing loads from 0.100 kg and
7.50 kg.
1. Check that the display reads 0.000 kg when at rest with nothing
on the weighing surface. (The Yellow LED is steadily lit).
2. Place a 100 gram weight on the center of the weighing surface
and check that the display reads 0.100 kg.
3. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing sur-
face and check that the display reads 0.300 kg.
4. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing sur-
face and check that the display reads 0.500 kg.
5. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing sur-
face and check that the display reads 0.600 kg.
6. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing sur-
face and check that the display reads 0.700 kg.
7. Place an additional 100 grams on the center of the weighing sur-
face and check that the display reads 0.800 kg.
8. Place an additional 200 grams on the center of the weighing sur-
face and check that the display reads 1.000 kg.

Product Reference Guide 5-13


9. Increase the weight on the scale to 7.50 kg on the center of the
weighing surface and check that the display reads between 7.495
and 7.505 kg.
10. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.000 kg.
You have completed the Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1).

Shift Test (Metric)


The Shift Test checks to ensure that items placed anywhere on the weigh-
ing surface of the scanner/scale are weighed properly. Refer to Figure 5-3
when performing this test.
1. Place and remove a 5.0 kilogram load on the center of each of the
four quadrants (A, B, C, and D in Figure 5-3) and in the center
of the scanner/scale’s weighing platform in succession. Verify that
the display shows a reading of between 4.995 and 5.005 kg for
each quadrant/center test and that the display returns to 0.000
between each load.
2. After verifying the accuracy of each quadrant and the center of
the weighing surface, remove all weight from the scale. You have
completed the Shift Test.

5-14 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Figure 5-3. European Shift Test (Metric)

A B
A B C
CENTER

D
C CENT
ER

Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2)


After completing the Shift Test, you must complete the Increasing Load
Test using 10.00, 12.50 and 15 kilograms of weight.

The upper limit of the scale is configurable according to POS interface type
and may not necessarily be set at 15 kilograms, which is the standard set-
ting. For this test, continue to place weights in 2.50 kilogram increments
NOTE only up to the upper weight limit set for your scale.

1. Place 10.00 kilograms in the center of the weighing surface and


check that the display reads between 9.990 kg and 10.010 kg.
2. Place an additional 2.50 kilograms in the center of the weighing
surface and check that the display reads between 12.490 kg and
12.510 kg.

Product Reference Guide 5-15


3. Place an additional 2.50 kilograms in the center of the weighing
surface and check that the display reads between 14.990 kg and
15.010 kg.
4. Remove the weights and verify that the display reads 0.000 kg.
5. You have completed phase two of the increasing load test.

Blanking Test
This test ensures that the scanner/scale will indicate its weighing capability
has been exceeded if a weight greater than 0.82 over its maximum upper
weight limit is placed upon the unit.
1. Place weights that total the upper limit plus 0.82 kilograms on
the weigh platter. For example: If the upper limit is set at 15 kilo-
grams, place weights equaling 15.82 kilograms.
2. Verify that the display shows a dash and three hyphens ( _ - - -).
This is the overweight indication.

The scanner/scale may blank (show an underscore and three hyphens) at


any weight greater than its upper limit, but must blank when the upper limit
plus 0.82 kilograms are set upon the weighing surface.
NOTE

5-16 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Decreasing-Load Test
This test ensures that the scanner/scale responds properly when a heavy
object is followed by a significantly smaller object.
1. Place weights that total 15.8 kilograms.

If the upper weight limit for your scale is not set at 15 kilograms, begin by
placing weight equaling your upper limit setting plus 0.8 kilograms.
NOTE
2. Remove weights to leave 10 kilograms on the scale and verify that
the display shows between 9.990 and 10.010 kilograms.
3. Remove an additional 9.00 kilograms from the scale and check
that the scale reads 1.000 kg.
4. You have completed the Decreasing Load Test.

Return to Zero Test


This test ensures that, after all other tests have been completed success-
fully, the scanner/scale returns to zero. Without any weight on the weigh
platter, verify that the scale reads 0.000 kg.
You have completed the calibration and verification process for weighing
in kilograms.
If the scanner/scale passes all these tests,
1. Remove the weigh platter, install the calibration switch cover and
install a seal (if required).
2. Reinstall the weigh platter.
If the scanner/scale fails any of these tests, it should be serviced by a quali-
fied technician.

Product Reference Guide 5-17


NOTES

5-18 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Section 6
Programming
Introduction to Label Programming
The programming bar code labels contained in this manual will allow you
to customize and configure features and settings for your scanner (scan-
ner/scale). To ensure full compatibility and proper function, use only the
programming bar codes in this manual and other product-specific publi-
cations to program scanner features.
This manual has been developed to make it quick and easy for users of all
levels to find the information needed to understand and configure fea-
tures. The following descriptions will help you to determine where to go
from here.
Understanding the Basics
If you have little or no prior experience with programming using bar code
labels, you should review the first few pages of this section to familiarize
yourself with the basics of scanner programming before performing any
changes to your configuration.
Integrating the Scanner With Your Host
System
Your scanner MUST be equipped with the correct hardware (interface
board, cable, etc.) to properly communicate with your host system. Con-
tact your dealer for information if you have questions about your scanner’s
hardware compatibility.
You may also want to contact the dealer or your system administrator if
you have no record of how your scanner was pre-programmed at the fac-
tory. Scanners are typically programmed with the default settings for spe-
cific interface types (see Appendix E, Factory Defaults for more
information); however, your scanner may have been custom configured
with settings that are unique to your company or application.

Product Reference Guide 6-1


Once you know the scanner’s current settings, you can determine what
changes will be required to allow communication with your host system
and/or optional features you choose to modify to customize your installa-
tion. After recording the modifications needed, finish reading this section,
then turn to the appropriate page and follow the instructions to program
the scanner.
When all scanner features are programmed to your satisfaction, the scan-
ner is ready to be placed into operation.

Customizing Your Scanner’s Operation


Most scanner programming falls within three general categories:
• General Scanner and Scale Features - are features common to all
interface types. Examples include beeper adjustments such as vol-
ume and length, read verification settings, etc.
• Interface Related Features - are the mandatory settings necessary
to allow communication with your host terminal. Examples of
these settings are: RS-232 baud rate and parity.

It is possible, via programming bar codes, to change the interface type (for
example: from RS-232 to IBM Port 17). Great care should be taken to select the
correct interface type, since you can cause damage to the scanner and/or
POS terminal by attempting to change to an incompatible interface. ALWAYS
CAUTION make interface selections with the host cable DISCONNECTED.

Ensure that your planned modifications are compatible with the current inter-
face. For example, baud rate selections are only valid in the RS-232 interface.
The scanner will sound an error tone when scanning programming labels for
features invalid to the current interface group.
NOTE
• Symbology Programming - gives the scanner the capability to
autodiscriminate as few as one, and as many as all available sym-
bologies. For optimal scanner performance enable only those
symbologies required. Additionally the scanner may be pro-
grammed with the standard options available for the various sym-
bologies, such as check digit, minimum label length, fixed and
variable length bar codes, etc.

6-2 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


If you experience difficulties, have questions or require additional infor-
mation, contact your local distributor, or call your dealer or sales represen-
tative.
Programming Overview
The scanner’s programmable feature settings can be modified to accom-
modate your system’s unique requirements. These settings can be commu-
nicated to the scanner in one of two ways:
1. Commands can be sent directly from the host. A limited set of
host commands are available. Refer to Appendix D for more
details or contact Tech Support.
2. Programming bar code labels can also be used to modify the scan-
ner’s programmable settings. This manual provides the bar code
labels and instructions necessary to configure the scanner’s fea-
tures and options.

When you program the scanner using any of the methods above, the scan-
ner will store the changes until reprogrammed or returned to factory
defaults.
NOTE

Programming via Handheld Device


The scanner can also accept programming via its auxilliary port using a
handheld scanning device. Eligible handheld devices must have the ability
to transmit Code 128 function codes such as the programming bar codes
presented in this manual. PSC models QuickScan® 1000 and Quick-
Scan® 6000 support this functionality. Handheld data format require-
ments (baud rate, parity, etc.) are presented in Appendix F of this manual.
Additionally the programmable feature, Aux Port Mode, must be set to
“External Handheld Input” to allow operation.

Product Reference Guide 6-3


What Is Programming Mode?
Programming Mode is a state in which the scanner must be placed in
order to accept commands via programming bar code labels. When pro-
gramming using the bar code labels in this manual, the scanner is typically
placed in Programming Mode by scanning the SWITCH label.
While in the Programming Mode, the scanner only recognizes the special
programming bar codes contained in this programming guide. See
Appendix A for information about scanner indications while in the Pro-
gramming Mode.

Entering and Exiting Programming Mode.


Use the bar code label below to enter and exit (‘switch” into and out of )
Programming Mode.

SWITCH LABEL

6-4 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Programming Session
A typical programming session is conducted as follows:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code to place the scanner in Programming
Mode. Depending upon its current programming, the scanner
may emit a beep or beeps, indicating it has read the bar code and
the green LED will flash on and off slowly while the scanner
remains in Programming Mode. Normal scanning functions are
disabled.
2. Scan the programming bar code(s) that is (are) specially encoded
to make the desired changes. With few exceptions1, the scanner
will emit a triple beep each time you scan a valid programming
bar code.

Not all features are available for all interfaces and the scanner will sound
an error tone when scanning programming bar codes for features invalid
to the current interface. Only features supported by the currently active
interface will be implemented.
NOTE

If a bar code is scanned that changes the scanner’s interface, all previous
configuration items scanned in the programming session are lost.
NOTE
Additionally, when programming a feature requiring you to scan single
digits to set a multi-digit number, such as Minimum Label Length, scan-
ning the SWITCH bar code (or any item tag/item value bar code) before
completing all input will result in an error tone and cause the scanner to
exit Programming Mode. Under these circumstances, the current feature
you were trying to set is thrown out; any previous bar codes scanned dur-
ing the session will take effect.

1. Some features, such as Minimum Label Length, require you to select the label’s length by scan-
ning a series of single-digit bar codes. A single ‘good read’ beep is sounded when scanning these
single digits in Programming Mode. Only the final required digit in the sequence will produce a tri-
ple beep when scanned, indicating a successfully programmed feature.

Product Reference Guide 6-5


It is recommended that programming sessions be limited to one feature
at a time. Should you make a mistake in the programming sequence, it
can be difficult to discover where an error has been made if several fea-
tures are programmed at once. Additionally, it can be confusing to deter-
NOTE mine which features may or may not have been successfully set following
such a session.
3. Scan the SWITCH bar code to save any new settings and exit
Programming Mode. The scanner will sound a beep and reset
upon exiting Programming Mode, and the green LED will return
to its usual state (on steady or off ).

The scanner will exit Programming Mode under the following


conditions:
— the programming sequence has been completed or the
SWITCH bar code is scanned
— five minutes have passed without scanning activity. Any data
programmed during the current session will be ignored1, and
the scanner will reset and revert to its condition previous to
initiating the exited session.
— power is disconnected. Disconnecting power during Pro-
gramming Mode, before scanning the SWITCH bar code,
will cause all new settings to be ignored. On power-up, the
scanner will return to previous settings.
4. Maintain a good record of all changes made to ensure that you
know if the original factory settings have been changed.

1. Exception: If an interface bar code had been read while in Programming Mode, the scanner will
operate on the default settings for the new interface.

6-6 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Programming Sequence
To modify a scanner feature (item), the programming bar codes contained
in this manual must be scanned in a given sequence depending upon the
feature being programmed (as shown in Table 6-1). There are three possi-
ble programming sequences:

If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that inter-
face configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming ses-
sion. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items to
NOTE the factory default for that interface type.)

A. Programming sample A (the most commonly used format) dem-


onstrates how three bar codes are scanned in sequence to do the
following:
1. Place the scanner in Programming Mode (SWITCH bar
code).
2. Scan the Item Tag1 that will enable the new feature.
3. End the programming session and reset the scanner
(SWITCH bar code).
B. Sample B provides an example of a programming feature requir-
ing the entry of a range value. Like sample A, the scanner is
placed in Programming Mode and an Item Tag1 is scanned.
Then, a value must be entered before ending the programming
session. In the example, three digits must be scanned from the
number pad in Appendix C. This type of format, requiring several
bar codes, is necessary to allow flexible programming for item val-
ues with larger numeric ranges.
C. The programming sequence shown in example C requires scan-
ning of a single, extended length bar code. This special program-
ming bar code contains all the data necessary to enter
Programming Mode, set the Item Tag1 and Item Value, and exit
Programming Mode (all in one step).

1. An “Item Tag” is a term used to describe an assigned number, which is encoded in a programming
bar code, that toggles (selects, enables, disables, etc.) a specific programming feature.

Product Reference Guide 6-7


Table 6-1. Programming Sequence

SET ITEM TAG ITEM VALUE END/RESET

1 2 3
A SWITCH
ENABLE
NEW FEATURE SWITCH

1 2 345 6
0

B ENABLE NEW
FEATURE
USING THE
0

FOLLOWING
SWITCH SETTINGS... 8 SWITCH

C 1
ONE BAR CODE CONTAINS SWITCH + ITEM TAG + ITEM VALUE + SWITCH

6-8 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


LED and Beeper Indicators
The scanner provides a set of indicators that verify/announce the various
scanner functions.

If You Make a Mistake...


If, during a programming session, you find that you are unsure of the
scanner’s settings or wish to reset the scanner’s configuration, use the
Return to Factory Settings label below to return the scanner’s configura-
tion to the factory settings. Scanning this label will also reset any changes
made during previous programming sessions.

Return to Factory Settings


Scan this bar code to return the scanner to the default settings configured
at the factory for the currently active interface. This bar code is typically
used to return the scanner to a “known” operating state when the present
programming status is not known, faulty, or suspect.

Use this bar code with caution, since it will reset ALL features that may have
been programmed since the scanner’s installation.
CAUTION

DO NOT scan the SWITCH bar code before and after scanning this bar code.

NOTE

RETURN TO FACTORY SETTINGS

Product Reference Guide 6-9


Test Mode
Use this feature to place the scanner into a testing, or “demo” mode. This
special mode disables the scanner interface, meaning that bar code data is
not sent out to the host via the scanner interface. This allows the bar code
to be scanned continuously without requiring a response from the POS
terminal.
To return the scanner to normal function, scan the TEST MODE = DIS-
ABLE bar code below.

DO NOT scan the SWITCH bar code before and after scanning the bar codes
on this page.
Scanning the TEST MODE = DISABLE bar code sets the Double Read
NOTE Timeout to 600ms.

TEST MODE = DISABLE

TEST MODE = ENABLE

6-10 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


General Scanner and Scale Features
Double Read Timeout
The Double Read Timeout feature sets a time limit that determines how
much time must pass before reading the same label again (e.g. two identi-
cal items in succession).
To set the Double Read Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

If the incidence of multiple reads is not acceptable, increase the Double Read
Timeout setting to a higher value.
NOTE

DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 400ms

DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 600ms

Product Reference Guide 6-11


Double Read Timeout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 800ms

DOUBLE READ TIMEOUT = 1 SECOND

6-12 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Laser Timeout
The laser timeout feature sets the time for switching the visible laser
diodes (VLDs) off if the scanner is idle. Using this feature can prolong the
life of the VLDs.
To set the Laser Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

LASER TIMEOUT = 5 MINUTES

Product Reference Guide 6-13


Laser Timeout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

LASER TIMEOUT = 10 MINUTES

LASER TIMEOUT = 15 MINUTES

6-14 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Motor Timeout
The Motor Timeout feature sets the time for automatically switching the
motor off when the scanner is not in use.

Laser safety requires that the laser switch off before the motor. If you set the
motor timeout shorter than the laser timeout, the motor and the laser will
both shut off when the motor timeout expires.
NOTE
To set the Motor Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

MOTOR TIMEOUT = 5 MINUTES

Product Reference Guide 6-15


Motor Timeout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

MOTOR TIMEOUT = 10 MINUTES

MOTOR TIMEOUT = 15 MINUTES

6-16 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Motor Timeout — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

MOTOR TIMEOUT = 30 MINUTES

MOTOR TIMEOUT = 60 MINUTES

Product Reference Guide 6-17


Green LED Idle State
This feature specifies the state of the green scanner LED when the scanner
is idle and ready to read a label. Options are:
• Off
• On dim
To set the LED Idle State:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

GREEN LED IDLE STATE = OFF

GREEN LED IDLE STATE = ON DIM

6-18 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Scanner Button Options
Configure the scanner volume button to one of the following modes of
operation:
• Enable all functions: Volume, tone, diagnostics and reset.
• Enable only volume, tone and reset.
• Enable reset only.
• Disable all button functions
To set the desired Scanner Button Option:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SCANNER BUTTON OPTION = ENABLE ALL FUNCTIONS

SCANNER BUTTON OPTION = ENABLE ONLY VOLUME/TONE/RESET

Product Reference Guide 6-19


Scanner Button Options — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

SCANNER BUTTON OPTION = ENABLE RESET ONLY

SCANNER BUTTON OPTION = DISABLE ALL BUTTON FUNCTIONS

6-20 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Power-up Beep Control
Specifies the type of audible indication that is made when entering scan-
ner-active mode on power-up. Choices are:
• No beep
• One beep
• Three beeps
To set the Power-up Beep:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the three bar codes below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

POWER-UP BEEP = OFF

Product Reference Guide 6-21


Power-up Beep Control — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

POWER-UP BEEP = ONE BEEP

POWER-UP BEEP = THREE BEEPS

6-22 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Good Read Beep Control
This feature enables/disables scanner beep upon successfully decoding of a
label.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

GOOD READ BEEP = DISABLE

GOOD READ BEEP = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-23


Good Read Beep Frequency
Adjusts the scanner’s good read beep to sound at low, medium, or high fre-
quency (controls the beeper’s pitch/tone).
• Low = 660 Hz
• Medium = 860 Hz
• High = 1050 Hz
To set the Good Read Beep Frequency:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the three bar codes below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY = LOW

6-24 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Good Read Beep Frequency — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY = MEDIUM

GOOD READ BEEP FREQUENCY = HIGH

Product Reference Guide 6-25


Good Read Beep Length
Specifies the duration of a good read beep.
To set the good read beep length:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GOOD READ BEEP LENGTH. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired good read beep length setting. The select-
able range is 1-255, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond incre-
ments. Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading
zeroes to yield a three-digit entry (001-255).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned

SET GOOD READ BEEP LENGTH

6-26 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Good Read Beep Volume
Selects the beeper volume upon a good read beep. There are five selectable
volumes, with each volume increment adding approximately five decibels
to the previous level:
• 0 = Lowest Volume
• 1 = Medium-Low Volume
• 2 = Medium Volume
• 3 = Medium-High Volume
• 4 =Highest Volume
To set the Good Read Beep Volume:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selected volume bar code from this or the following
pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = LOWEST

Product Reference Guide 6-27


Good Read Beep Volume — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = MEDIUM LOW

GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = MEDIUM

6-28 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Good Read Beep Volume — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = MEDIUM HIGH

GOOD READ BEEP VOLUME = HIGHEST

Product Reference Guide 6-29


Good Read When to Indicate
This feature specifies when the scanner will provide indication (beep and/
or flash its green LED) upon successfully reading a bar code.
• Good Read = Indicate after decode
• Good Read = Indicate after transmit
• Good Read = Indicate after CTS goes inactive, then active

The “Indicate after CTS goes inactive...” mode applies to RS-232 STD and
RS-232 WN interfaces only. If set to this mode in other interfaces, “Indicate
after decode” mode will be implemented.
NOTE
To set the Good Read When to Indicate feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired mode bar code from this page. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

GOOD READ = INDICATE AFTER DECODE

6-30 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Good Read When to Indicate — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

GOOD READ = INDICATE AFTER TRANSMIT

GOOD READ = INDICATE AFTER CTS GOES INACTIVE, THEN ACTIVE


(RS-232 ONLY)

Product Reference Guide 6-31


Scale Enable
Use this feature to enable or disable scale operation.

Recalibration/recertification may be required when adding scale functional-


ity. Consult your local Weights and Measures authority.

If this feature is enabled the scanner will expect that it is to function as a


NOTE scanner-scale, and will indicate an error if it is not a scale-equipped unit.
See Error Codes in Section 4 for more information.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SCALE = DISABLE

SCALE = ENABLE

6-32 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Scale Country Mode
When a weight is presented, the scanner/scale will apply the country-spe-
cific weighing rules specified via this feature.

Scale Country Mode applies only when a scale is enabled.


RS-232 SASI scale interface supports only U.S.A. mode.
NOTE

SCALE COUNTRY MODE = U.S.A.

SCALE COUNTRY MODE = U.K.

Product Reference Guide 6-33


Scale Country Mode — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

SCALE COUNTRY MODE = AUSTRALIA

6-34 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Scale Enforced Zero Return
This feature enables/disables the enforced zero return of the scale. Three
settings are available for this feature:
• Disable
• Scale Must Return to Zero Weight Within Four Minutes — Scale
will require re-zeroing if a non-zero weight is left on for more
than 4 minutes
• Scale Must Return to Zero Weight Between Weight Requests —
Re-zeroing required if weight doesn't return to zero between
weight requests from the POS, plus scale will require re-zeroing if
a non-zero weight is left on for more than 4 minutes.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. The strat-
egy is to select the lowest possible filter level needed that allows
normal scale operation.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SCALE ENFORCED ZERO RETURN = DISABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-35


Scale Enforced Zero Return — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

SCALE ENFORCED ZERO RETURN = SCALE MUST RETURN TO ZERO WEIGHT


WITHIN 4 MINUTES

SCALE ENFORCED ZERO RETURN = SCALE MUST RETURN TO ZERO WEIGHT


BETWEEN WEIGHT REQUESTS

6-36 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Scale Interface Type
Use this feature to select the scale interface type. Choices are:
• No Scale Interface
• RS-232 — SASI
• RS-232 — ICL
To set the Scale Interface Type:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SCALE INTERFACE TYPE = NO SCALE INTERFACE

SCALE INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 — SASI

Product Reference Guide 6-37


Scale Interface Type — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

SCALE INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 — ICL

6-38 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Scale Motion Level Filter
In environments where checkstands generate excessive vibration, the scale
can be set to filter a certain amount of the motion with regard to its oper-
ation.

This filter is generally used only in applications where scale error E_1 (too
much motion at power-up) has occurred.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan. The strat-
egy is to select the lowest possible filter level needed that allows
normal scale operation.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SCALE MOTION LEVEL FILTER = LOW

SCALE MOTION LEVEL FILTER = MEDIUM LOW

Product Reference Guide 6-39


Scale Motion Level Filter — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

SCALE MOTION LEVEL FILTER = MEDIUM HIGH

SCALE MOTION LEVEL FILTER = HIGH

6-40 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Scale LED Enable
This feature enables/disables Scale LED (Yellow LED) operation.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the two bar codes below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SCALE LED = DISABLE

SCALE LED = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-41


Remote Display — Enable/Disable
The scanner-scale can be configured to operate with or without a Remote
Display.

Recalibration/recertification may be required when adding a Remote Display.


Consult your local Weights and Measures authority.

If this feature is enabled the scanner-scale will expect that it is connected to


NOTE a Remote Display, and will indicate an error if one is not. See Error Codes
in Section 4 for more information.

REMOTE DISPLAY = DISABLE

REMOTE DISPLAY = ENABLE

6-42 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


EAS Active State
Specifies the active state polarity of EAS (Electronic Article Survellance);
the inactive state is its opposite polarity. EAS output goes active during the
good read of a bar code, allowing the EAS device to deactivate a tag on the
product.
To set the EAS Active State:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan bar code below representing the desired setting. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAS ACTIVE STATE = ACTIVE LOW

EAS ACTIVE STATE = ACTIVE HIGH

Product Reference Guide 6-43


EAS Timeout
Specifies the amount of time that an EAS (Electronic Article Survellance)
signal is held in its active state for a good read.
To set the EAS Timeout:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAS TIMEOUT below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired EAS Timeout duration. The selectable range
is 0-255, which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad
all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a
three-digit entry (000-255).
Examples:
000 = EAS timeout disabled
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
250 = 2,500ms (2.5 seconds)

A setting of 0 (000) disables this feature.

NOTE
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned

SET EAS TIMEOUT

6-44 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Aux Port Mode
Selects the usage for the scanner’s optional auxilliary port. The choices
listed below are mutually exclusive (only one option can be active at a
time).
• Disabled — Port is inactive
• External Handheld Input — Supports PSC® handheld scanners
(QuickScan 1000, QuickScan 6000, PowerScan) as well as other
models such as the Symbol® HotShot. Call your dealer for more
information about supported devices.

Cable pinout information for the Aux Port is provided in Appendix B of


this manual. A connected handheld scanner must be configured to transmit
data as outlined in Appendix F.
NOTE
• PIR — PIR (Productivity Index Reporting) allows the scanner to
provide information to an external computer indicating how easy
the label was to read.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

AUX PORT MODE = DISABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-45


Aux Port Mode — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

AUX PORT MODE = EXTERNAL HANDHELD INPUT

AUX PORT MODE = PIR

6-46 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Productivity Index Reporting (PIR)
When PIR is enabled, label quality data is appended to decoded data
before being presented to the POS. The PIR feature allows the scanner to
provide information to an external computer indicating how easy the label
was to read.

This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact your


dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this advanced
capability.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

PIR = DISABLE

PIR = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-47


Interface Related Features
Interface Type

The 8100 scanner family supports only a single interface type defined at
the factory. 8100 scanners that support either IBM USB or IBM Port 17
cannot have their interface type changed, and will reject programmining
bar codes that attempt to change it. 8100 scanners that support one of the
NOTE RS-232 interface types can be changed to another RS-232 type, but can-
not be changed to IBM USB or IBM Port 17.
Specifies the current scanner interface. Selections are:

INTERFACE TYPE INTERFACE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERa

RS-232 Standard 05

RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf 12

RS-232 Single Cable 20

IBM USB 45

IBM Port 17 04

NOT USER-SELECTABLE

Indicated by 7-segment FRU display flashing


Null Interface
0 at start-up

a. To access a scanner’s interface identification number, place the


scanner in Scanner Diagnostic Mode and view the 7-segment FRU
display (reference Scanner Diagnostic Mode in Section 2 for more
information).

A new scanner may have been shipped from the factory with a Null Inter-
face (no interface type selected) to ensure system compatibility at instal-
lation. In this case, the correct Interface Type programming bar code must
NOTE be scanned first before the scanner can be used with a POS system.

6-48 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that inter-
face configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming ses-
sion. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items to
NOTE the factory default for that interface type.)

Interface Type — continued


To select the desired interface:

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can
cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to
an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host
CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED.

When an interface is selected, the scanner loads the factory configuration for
that interface as the selection is made, erasing any and all custom configura-
tion that may have previously been done.
NOTE
1. Disconnect current interface cable(s) if currently connected.
2. Scan the SWITCH bar code
3. Scan the bar code representing the appropriate interface located
on the following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes
adjacent to and on any facing pages to ensure the scanner reads
only the bar code you intend to scan.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

Once the correct interface has been set, it will be necessary to proceed to
the appropriate pages in this manual that select parameters and options for
that interface. For example, if RS-232 is selected, turn to the pages in this
NOTE manual headed as features specific to the RS-232 interface.

5. Connect new interface cable(s).

Product Reference Guide 6-49


RS-232 Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can
cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to
an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host
CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED.

INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 STANDARD

6-50 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can
cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to
an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host
CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED.

INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 WINCOR-NIXDORF

Product Reference Guide 6-51


RS-232 Single Cable Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can
cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to
an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host
CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED.

Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal (host) port.
The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface.
NOTE

INTERFACE TYPE = RS-232 SINGLE CABLE

6-52 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


IBM Port 17 Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can
cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to
an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host
CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED.

Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal (host) port.
The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface.
NOTE

INTERFACE TYPE = IBM PORT 17

Product Reference Guide 6-53


IBM USB Interface Selection
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Great care should be taken to select the correct interface type, since you can
cause damage to the scanner and/or POS terminal by attempting to change to
an incompatible interface. ALWAYS make interface selections with the host
CAUTION cable DISCONNECTED.

Single cable installations require connection at the POS Terminal (host)


port. The Scale Host port connection is not used for this interface.
NOTE

INTERFACE TYPE = IBM USB

6-54 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length
Specifies the maximum number of data characters allowed in messages
transmitted to the host.
To set the Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MAXIMUM HOST-TRANSMITTED
MESSAGE LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar
codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads
only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired maximum host-transmitted message length.
The selectable range is 0-249 data characters. (Labels that are
longer than this length are not read.) Pad all single and double
digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry
(000-249).

If this configuration item is set to 0 (000), there is no general length limit


imposed on data being transmitted to the host.
NOTE
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned

SET MAXIMUM HOST-TRANSMITTED MESSAGE LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 6-55


Number of Host Transmission Buffers
Specifies the number of host transmission(s) that may be buffered. By
buffering data from a bar code, the scanner can continue to read a new bar
code while the old one is being transmitted to the host. Selecting BUFF-
ERS = 1 means that the first bar code must be transmitted before a new
one can be read. A selection of BUFFERS = 2 means that a new bar code
can be read while data from the first bar code is transmitted. When the
feature, Good Read Beep Control, is enabled, the scanner will beep when
the data is placed in a transmission buffer.
When a DISABLE SCANNER command is received from the host, the
scanner will continue to transmit all data that is buffered.
To select the Number of Host Transmission Buffers:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan bar code below representing the desired setting. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

NUMBER OF HOST TRANSMISSION BUFFERS = 1

NUMBER OF HOST TRANSMISSION BUFFERS = 2

6-56 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Global Prefix
This feature applies to RS-232 interfaces (Standard, Wincor-Nixdorf, and
Single Cable). It specifies the prefix that is added to beginning of label
transmission.
To specify the Global Prefix Character(s):
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GLOBAL PREFIX below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes to ensure the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in
Appendix C that represent the hex designation for the desired
character(s). A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their
corresponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of
this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair
of hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-char-
acter value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and
‘2’ must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any
hex value from 00 to FF. Up to 20 hex pairs can be designated.

To specify “no Global Prefix,” scan 00.

NOTE
4. If designating the full 20 hex pairs, the scanner will automatically
exit Programming Mode when the appropriate amount of digits
have been scanned. If designating less than 20 hex pairs, you can
end the programming sequence early by scanning the TERMI-
NATE SEQUENCE bar code.
5. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

Product Reference Guide 6-57


Global Prefix — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

SET GLOBAL PREFIX

TERMINATE SEQUENCE

6-58 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Global Suffix
This feature applies to RS-232 interfaces (Standard, Wincor-Nixdorf, and
Single Cable). It specifies the suffix that is added to end of a label trans-
mission. Three standard options are available below. Contact your dealer
for other alternate settings for this feature.
• No Global Suffix
• CR — Carriage Return
• CR LF — Carriage Return, Line Feed
To set the Global Suffix:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

GLOBAL SUFFIX = NO GLOBAL SUFFIX

Product Reference Guide 6-59


Global Suffix — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

GLOBAL SUFFIX = CR

GLOBAL SUFFIX = CR LF

6-60 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


IBM Features
IBM Interface Options
IBM interfaces offer specific control over interaction with certain devices.

The IBM USB interface provides its own set of options. Refer to the feature,
IBM USB Interface Options, in this chapter.
NOTE

Options for this feature are as follows:


• FULL host interface support — Accepts scanner and scale config-
uration host commands.
• Ignore host interface configuration of scanner and scale —
Ignores all scanner and scale configuration host commands.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

IBM INTERFACE OPTION = FULL HOST INTERFACE SUPPORT

IBM INTERFACE OPTION = IGNORE HOST I/F CONFIG OF SCANNER & SCALE

Product Reference Guide 6-61


IBM Scale Address

This feature applies to IBM Port 17 ONLY.

NOTE

Specifies IBM scale address for IBM Port 17. The following three
addresses are available:
• 6A
• 6B
• 6E
To set the IBM Scale Address:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below or from the following page that represents
the desired scale address designation.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

IBM SCALE ADDRESS = 6A

6-62 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


IBM Scale Address — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

IBM SCALE ADDRESS = 6B

IBM SCALE ADDRESS = 6E

Product Reference Guide 6-63


IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format
This feature enables/disables scanner's ability to set a symbology identifier
for a specified label to Code 39 before transmitting that label data to an
IBM host. This applies to: Code 128, Code 93 and Codabar for IBM Port
5B; Code 93 and Codabar for IBM Port 9B; Code 128, Code 93 and
Codabar for IBM-USB.

When enabled, this feature has no effect on IBM Port 17.

NOTE

To enable/disable the IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

IBM TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT = DISABLE

IBM TRANSMIT LABELS IN CODE 39 FORMAT = ENABLE

6-64 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


IBM USB Interface Options
The IBM-USB interface offers specific control over interaction with cer-
tain devices. Options for this feature are as follows:
• FULL host interface support — Accepts scanner and scale config-
uration host commands.
• Compatible with Magellan SL host interface support — Uses
Magellan SL host interface support.
• Ignore host interface configuration of scanner and scale —
Ignores all scanner and scale configuration host commands.

This feature applies only to the IBM USB interface. For other IBM interfaces,
refer to the feature, IBM Interface Options, earlier in this chapter.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

IBM USB INTERFACE OPTION = FULL HOST INTERFACE SUPPORT

Product Reference Guide 6-65


IBM USB Interface Options — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

IBM USB INTERFACE OPTION = COMPATIBLE W/MAGELLAN SL HOST I/F SUP-


PORT

IBM USB INTERFACE OPTION = IGNORE HOST I/F CONFIG OF SCANNER &
SCALE

6-66 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


IBM USB Scanner Device Type
The IBM-USB protocol allows for the scanner to be identified as one of
two different types of barcode scanners. Depending on what other scan-
ners you may already have connected to a USB POS, you may need to
change this setting to enable all scanners to communicate. Options are:
• Table Top Scanner
• Handheld Scanner
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

IBM USB SCANNER DEVICE TYPE = TABLE TOP SCANNER

IBM USB SCANNER DEVICE TYPE = HANDHELD SCANNER

Product Reference Guide 6-67


RS-232 Features
RS-232 Baud Rate
This feature selects the baud rate required for sending and receiving data.

Single cable interfaces are limited to Baud Rate selections up to 19200. They
cannot communicate at Baud Rates of 38400 and up.
NOTE
To specify the RS-232 Baud Rate:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired baud rate from the bar codes below and on the
immediately following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar
codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads
only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 1200

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 2400

6-68 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RS-232 Baud Rate — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 4800

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 9600

Product Reference Guide 6-69


RS-232 Baud Rate — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 19200

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 38400

6-70 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RS-232 Baud Rate — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 57600

RS-232 BAUD RATE = 115200

Product Reference Guide 6-71


RS-232 Number of Data Bits
Specifies number of data bits required for sending and receiving data.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired Data Bit setting.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 NUMBER OF DATA BITS = 7

RS-232 NUMBER OF DATA BITS = 8

6-72 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RS-232 Number of Stop Bits
Specifies number of stop bits required for sending and receiving data.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired Stop Bit setting.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 NUMBER OF STOP BITS = 1

RS-232 NUMBER OF STOP BITS = 2

Product Reference Guide 6-73


RS-232 Parity
Specifies parity required for sending and receiving data.
Options for this setting are:
• RS-232 PARITY = NONE
• RS-232 PARITY = EVEN
• RS-232 PARITY = ODD
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below or on the following pages representing
the desired Parity setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar
codes, as well as facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only
the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 PARITY = NONE

6-74 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RS-232 Parity — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 PARITY = EVEN

RS-232 PARITY = ODD

Product Reference Guide 6-75


RS-232 Hardware Control
Enables/disables use of the RS-232 CTS signal for flow control and/or
scan control.
Options are:
• Disable — The scanner transmits to the host regardless of any
activity on the CTS line.
• Enable CTS Flow Control — The CTS signal controls transmis-
sion of data to the host.
• Enable CTS Scan Control — The CTS line must be active for
scanner to read and transmit data. While the CTS line is inactive,
scanner remains in a host- disabled state; following a successful
label transmission, the CTS signal must transition to inactive and
then to active to enable scanning for the next label.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan bar code below or from the following page for the desired
setting. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing pages
to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = DISABLE

6-76 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RS-232 Hardware Control — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = ENABLE CTS FLOW CONTROL

RS-232 HARDWARE CONTROL = ENABLE CTS SCAN CONTROL

Product Reference Guide 6-77


RS-232 Intercharacter Delay
Specifies delay between the end of one character and the beginning of the
next in 10-millisecond increments.
To set the RS-232 Intercharacter Delay:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 INTERCHARACTER
DELAY. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired delay. The selectable range is 0-100, which is
the delay in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single and double
digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-digit entry
(000-100).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
100 = 1,000ms (1 second)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET RS-232 INTERCHARACTER DELAY

6-78 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RS-232 Software Flow Control
Enables/disables RS-232 Flow Control using XON/ XOFF characters. .

This item will be ignored when the feature, RS-232 NAK Character, is
enabled
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL = DISABLE

RS-232 SOFTWARE FLOW CONTROL = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-79


RS-232 Host Echo
When enabled, this feature passes all data through the scanner to the host
as it comes in. This feature is used for applications where “daisy chaining”
of RS-232 devices onto the same cable is necessary. If, for example, one of
the devices in the chain is a terminal where someone is entering data while
another person is simultaneously scanning a bar code requiring transmis-
sion to the host, the scanner will wait for the RS-232 channel to be quiet
for a specified period of time (set via RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval).
The scanner can be set to observe this delay before sending its data in
order to avoid RS-232 transmission conflicts.

When RS-232 Host Echo is enabled, the following features are ignored: RS-
232 Software Flow Control and RS-232 ACK NAK Enable as well
as all other ACK/ NAK related operations, plus processing of RS-232 host
NOTE commands.

To enable/disable this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 HOST ECHO = DISABLE

RS-232 HOST ECHO = ENABLE

6-80 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval
This setting specifies the time interval of RS-232 channel inactivity which
must transpire before the scanner will break the host echo loop to transmit
the bar code data that has just been scanned to the host.
• 0 - 100 = Time in 10-millisecond increments.
To set the Host Echo Quiet Interval:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 HOST ECHO QUIET
INTERVAL. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this
and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired timeout. The selectable range is 0-100,
which is the timeout in 10-millisecond increments. Pad all single
and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to yield a three-
digit entry (000-100).
Examples:
001 = 10ms
005 = 50ms
040 = 400ms
100 = 1,000ms (1 second)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET RS-232 HOST ECHO QUIET INTERVAL

Product Reference Guide 6-81


RS-232 Ignore Host Commands
When set to ignore host commands, the scanner will ignore all host com-
mands except for the minimum set necessary to keep the interface active,
transmit labels, and transmit scale information. For normal operation of
the interface, disable this feature.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 IGNORE HOST COMMANDS = DISABLE

RS-232 IGNORE HOST COMMANDS = ENABLE

6-82 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RS-232 TTL
Specifies whether RS-232 interface provides TTL levels on the output
pins TxD and RTS.
Choices are:
• Normal RS-232 levels
• TTL levels
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for
this feature. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 LEVELS = NORMAL RS-232

RS-232 LEVELS = TTL

Product Reference Guide 6-83


RS-232 TTL Invert
Enables/disables inversion of TTL.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below which represents the desired setting for
this feature. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 TTL INVERT = DISABLE

RS-232 TTL INVERT = ENABLE

6-84 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL
Enables/disables ability of scanner to beep (sound a good read tone) on
receiving an ASCII BEL (07 hex).
• Disable
• Enable
To enable/disable this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 BEEP ON ASCII BEL = DISABLE

RS-232 BEEP ON ASCII BEL = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-85


RS-232 Beep After Weigh
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to beep after weight data is
transmitted to the host. Scale interfaces that support this item are: RS-232
ICL, RS-232 SASI, and RS-232 Single Cable.
To enable/disable the Beep After Weigh feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

BEEP AFTER WEIGH = DISABLE

BEEP AFTER WEIGH = ENABLE

6-86 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RS-232 Beep on Not on File
Select for the host to beep (or not) when a not-on-file condition is
detected by the host. This feature is also applicable to single cable RS-232.

RS-232 BEEP ON NOT ON FILE = DISABLE

ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-87


RS-232 ACK NAK Enable
This enables/disables the ability of the scanner to support the RS-232
ACK/NAK protocol. When configured, the scanner and/or host sends an
“ACK” when it receives data properly, and sends “NAK” when the data is
in error. Selections for this option are:
• Disable
• Label Transmission — the scanner expects an ACK/NAK
response from the host when a label is sent)
• Host Acknowledgement — Enabled for Host Commands (the
scanner will respond with ACK/NAK when the host sends a com-
mand)
• Label & Host — Enabled for both Label Transmission & Host
Commands
To select the option for RS-232 ACK NAK Enable:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired option from bar codes below and on the follow-
ing page. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 ACK NAK = DISABLE

RS-232 ACK/NAK = LABEL TRANSMISSION

6-88 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RS-232 ACK NAK Enable — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 ACK/NAK = HOST ACKNOWLEDGEMENT

RS-232 ACK/NAK = LABEL & HOST

Product Reference Guide 6-89


RS-232 ACK Character
This feature specifies which ASCII character will be used as an ACK char-
acter.

DO NOT set this feature to use previously defined characters such as XON,
XOFF or host commands as this will conflict with normal operation of these
characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the feature, RS-232 Num-
NOTE ber of Data Bits, is set to 7 data bits.

To specify the RS-232 ACK Character:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 ACK Character below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the hex designation for the desired character. A table
containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex
Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII
parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal dig-
its for the desired character. For example, if ASCII “A” were the
desired ACK character, you would scan the digits “4”, then “1”
(the ASCII corresponding hex value).
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits/characters have been scanned.

SET RS-232 ACK Character

6-90 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RS-232 NAK Character
This feature specifies which ASCII character will be used as a NAK char-
acter.

DO NOT set this feature to use previously defined characters such as XON,
XOFF or host commands as this will conflict with normal operation of these
characters. 8-bit data is not recognized when the feature, RS-232 Number
NOTE of Data Bits, is set to 7 data bits.

To specify the RS-232 NAK Character:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 NAK Character below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the hex designation for the desired character. A table
containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding Hex
Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual. ASCII
parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal dig-
its for the desired character. For example, if ASCII “A” were the
desired NAK character, you would scan the digits “4”, then “1”
(the ASCII corresponding hex value).
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits/characters have been scanned.

SET RS-232 NAK Character

Product Reference Guide 6-91


RS-232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout
This option specifies the action scanner performs on expiration of the RS-
232 ACK NAK Timeout Value.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 RETRY ON ACK NAK TIMEOUT = DISABLE

RS-232 RETRY ON ACK NAK TIMEOUT = ENABLE

6-92 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value
This item specifies the time the scanner will wait for an ACK character
from the host following a label transmission.
• 0 = Infinite timeout
• 1 - 75 = Timeout in 200-millisecond increments
To set the ACK NAK Timeout Value:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below, SET RS-232 ACK NAK TIMEOUT
VALUE. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired timeout. A setting of 0 specifies an infinite
timeout. The remaining selectable range is 1-75, which is the tim-
eout in 200-millisecond increments. Pad all single digit numbers
with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-75).
Examples:
00 = Infinite timeout
01 = 200ms
05 = 1,000ms (1 second)
40 = 8,000ms (8 seconds)
75 = 15,000ms (15 seconds)
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET RS-232 ACK NAK TIMEOUT VALUE

Product Reference Guide 6-93


RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count
This feature sets the number of times for the scanner to retry a label trans-
mission under a retry condition.
To set the RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RS-232 ACK NAK RETRY COUNT
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired number. The selectable range is 0-255 resets.
Pad all single and double digit numbers with leading zeroes to
yield a three-digit entry (000-255).

A setting of 255 specifies “retry forever.”

NOTE
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET RS-232 ACK NAK RETRY COUNT

6-94 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling
This item specifies the method the scanner will use to handle errors
detected while waiting to receive the ACK character from the host. Errors
include unrecognized host commands and communication errors such as
parity or framing errors.
• Ignore Errors (recommended setting)
• Assume ACK (risk of lost label data)
• Assume NAK (risk of duplicate label)
To select the option for RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the desired option from the bar codes below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = IGNORE ERRORS

Product Reference Guide 6-95


RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = ASSUME ACK

RS-232 ACK NAK ERROR HANDLING = ASSUME NAK

6-96 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RS-232 Label ID Control
This feature specifies whether or not Label IDs are transmitted to the host
and if so, whether to attach them as a prefix or suffix.

RS-232 LABEL ID CONTROL = DISABLE

RS-232 LABEL ID CONTROL = ENABLE AS PREFIX

Product Reference Guide 6-97


RS-232 Label ID Control — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RS-232 LABEL ID CONTROL = ENABLE AS SUFFIX

6-98 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Single Cable RS-232 Options
The RS-232 Single Cable interface shares some configuration options
with other RS-232 interfaces. Rather than repeat them in this section as
Single Cable options, please find them referenced as follows:
• RS-232 Baud Rate on page 68

• RS-232 Number of Data Bits on page 72

• RS-232 Number of Stop Bits on page 73

• RS-232 Parity on page 74

• RS-232 Software Flow Control on page 79

• RS-232 Beep After Weigh on page 86

• RS-232 Beep on Not on File on page 87

• RS-232 Label ID Control on page 97

Product Reference Guide 6-99


Single Cable RS-232 Scanner Only Protocol
This sets the type of interface protocol that will be used in Single Cable
RS-232.
Options are:
• Scanner/scale RS-232 protocol
• Scanner only RS-232 protocol
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired option. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 PROTOCOL = SCANNER/SCALE

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 PROTOCOL = SCANNER ONLY

6-100 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection
Specifies how RTS and CTS are used to control the data flow. RTS is con-
trolled by the Scanner and can be continuously held high/low, or can be
asserted during label transmission. The scanner looks at CTS, as the con-
figuration values state, to determine when to send label data.
Choices are:
• Option 0 = RTS is held in low state and CTS is ignored
• Option 1 = RTS is held in high state and CTS is ignored
• Option 2 = Assert RTS and wait for CTS to be asserted
• Option 3 = Assert RTS and ignore CTS
• Option 4 = RTS held low, wait for CTS to be asserted
• Option 5 = RTS held high, wait for CTS to be asserted
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan a bar code below or on the following pages representing the
desired option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes, as well
as facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 0

RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 1

Product Reference Guide 6-101


Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 2

RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 3

6-102 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 4

RTS CTS SELECTION = OPTION 5

Product Reference Guide 6-103


Single Cable RS-232 Use BCC
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use BCC.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE BCC = DISABLE

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE BCC = ENABLE

6-104 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use ACK/NAK.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE ACK/NAK = DISABLE

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE ACK/NAK = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-105


Single Cable RS-232 Use STX
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use STX.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE STX = DISABLE

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE STX = ENABLE

6-106 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Set Single Cable RS-232 STX Character
This feature selects the STX character.
To specify the STX Character:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 STX CHARAC-
TER below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in
Appendix C that represent the decimal designation for the desired
character. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their
corresponding decimal values is available in the inside back cover
of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning dec-
imal digits for each character. Pad all numbers with leading zeroes
to yield a three-digit entry (001-127). Thus, to set a single charac-
ter value of A, bar codes containing the digits ‘0’, ‘6’ and ‘5’ must
be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any decimal
value from 001 to 127.
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 STX CHARACTER

Product Reference Guide 6-107


Single Cable RS-232 Use ETX
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to use ETX.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE ETX = DISABLE

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 USE ETX = ENABLE

6-108 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character
Allows selection of the ETX character.
To specify the ETX Character:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 ETX CHARAC-
TER below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate characters/digits from the keypad in
Appendix C that represent the decimal designation for the desired
character. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their
corresponding decimal values is available in the inside back cover
of this manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning dec-
imal digits for each character. Pad all numbers with leading zeroes
to yield a three-digit entry (001-127). Thus, to set a single charac-
ter value of A, bar codes containing the digits ‘0’, ‘6’ and ‘5’ must
be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any decimal
value from 001 to 127.
4. The scanner will automatically exit Programming Mode when the
appropriate amount of digits have been scanned.

SET SINGLE CABLE RS-232 ETX CHARACTER

Product Reference Guide 6-109


Single Cable RS-232 PSC Extensions
When PSC extensions are enabled, scale calibration mode information is
communicated to the host. Contact Customer Support for the format of
this information. Choices for this feature are:
• Standard Protocol
• Support PSC Extensions to Protocol
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 PSC EXTENSIONS = STANDARD PROTOCOL

SINGLE CABLE RS-232 PSC EXTENSIONS = SUPPORT PSC EXTENSIONS TO


PROTOCOL

6-110 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Symbology Programming
If the scanner’s interface type must be changed, always be sure that inter-
face configuration is the FIRST item scanned during a programming ses-
sion. (Selecting an interface type resets ALL other configuration items —
including symbology programming — to the factory default for that inter-
NOTE face type.)

UPC-A Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode UPC-A labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

UPC-A = DISABLE

UPC-A = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-111


UPC-A Number System Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-A number system character.

This feature MUST be enabled for IBM interfaces for proper function.
This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

UPC-A NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

UPC-A NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

6-112 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


UPC-A Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-A check character.

This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.

NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

UPC-A CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

UPC-A CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-113


Expand UPC-A to EAN-13
Enables/disables expansion of UPC-A labels to EAN/JAN-13.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EXPAND UPC-A TO EAN/JAN-13 = DISABLE

EXPAND UPC-A TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE

6-114 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


UPC/EAN AIM ID
This feature enables/disables transmission of the UPC/EAN AIM symbol-
ogy identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

UPC/EAN AIM ID = DISABLE

UPC/EAN AIM ID = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-115


UPC-A Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-A label ID to be added to bar code data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether


the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET UPC-A LABEL ID

6-116 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added
to bar code data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET UPC-A 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 6-117


UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added
to bar code data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET UPC-A 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

6-118 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


UPC-A 128 Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-A 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to
bar code data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-A 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET UPC-A 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 6-119


UPC-E Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode UPC-E labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

UPC-E = DISABLE

UPC-E = ENABLE

6-120 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


UPC-E Number System Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-E number system character.

This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.

NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

UPC-E NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

UPC-E NUMBER SYSTEM CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-121


UPC-E Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of a UPC-E check character.

This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.

NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

UPC-E CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

UPC-E CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

6-122 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Expand UPC-E to UPC-A
Enables/disables expansion of UPC-E labels to UPC-A.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EXPAND UPC-E TO UPC-A = DISABLE

EXPAND UPC-E TO UPC-A = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-123


Expand UPC-E to EAN-13
Enables/disables expansion of UPC-E labels to EAN/JAN-13.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EXPAND UPC-E TO EAN/JAN-13 = DISABLE

EXPAND UPC-E TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE

6-124 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


UPC-E Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-E label ID to be added to bar code data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether


the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET UPC-E LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 6-125


UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added
to bar code data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET UPC-E 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

6-126 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be added
to bar code data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether


the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET UPC-E 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 6-127


UPC-E 128 Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a UPC-E 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to
bar code data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET UPC-E 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET UPC-E 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

6-128 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


EAN-13 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN/JAN-13 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-13 = DISABLE

EAN-13 = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-129


EAN-13 First Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of EAN/JAN-13 first character.

This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.

NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-13 FIRST CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

EAN-13 FIRST CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

6-130 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


EAN-13 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN-13 check character.

This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.

NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-13 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

EAN-13 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-131


EAN-13 ISBN Conversion Enable
Enables/disables conversion of EAN/JAN-13 labels starting with 978 to
Bookland ISBN labels.

If any add-on information is present on the label prior to the conversion to


ISBN, the add-on data will be discarded. Only the base label will be con-
verted.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion= DISABLE

EAN-13 ISBN Conversion = ENABLE

6-132 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


EAN 13 Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN 13 label ID to be added to bar code data.
To set this feature:

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN 13 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN 13 LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 6-133


EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be
added to bar code data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether


the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-13 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN-13 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

6-134 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be
added to bar code data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-13 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN-13 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 6-135


EAN-13 128 Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN-13 128 Supplemental label ID to be added
to bar code data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-13 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
ID = DISABLE below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes
on this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN-13 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID = DISABLE

6-136 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Bookland AIM ID
This feature enables/disables transmission of the Bookland AIM symbol-
ogy identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

BOOKLAND AIM ID = DISABLE

BOOKLAND AIM ID = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-137


Bookland Label ID
This feature specifies a Bookland label ID to be added to bar code data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET BOOKLAND LABEL ID below. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET BOOKLAND LABEL ID

6-138 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


EAN-8 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN/JAN-8 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-8 = DISABLE

EAN-8 = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-139


EAN-8 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an EAN/JAN-8 check character.

This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.

NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-8 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

EAN-8 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

6-140 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13
Enables/disables expansion of EAN/JAN-8 labels to EAN/JAN-13.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EXPAND EAN/JAN-8 TO EAN/JAN-13 = DISABLE

EXPAND EAN/JAN-8 TO EAN/JAN-13 = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-141


EAN 8 Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN 8 label ID to be added to bar code data.
To set this feature:

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether


the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN 8 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN 8 LABEL ID

6-142 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental label ID to be
added to bar code data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether


the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-8 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN-8 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 6-143


EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental label ID to be
added to bar code data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-8 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN-8 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

6-144 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


EAN-8 128 Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN-8 128 Supplemental label ID to be added to
bar code data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN-8 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and
the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN-8 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 6-145


EAN-8 Decoding Levels
Decoding levels allow the decoder to be set to perform at one of four
selectable levels:
• Very Conservative — Slower scan time, however, allows few, if
any, misreads. The most secure setting.
• Slightly More Aggressive — Faster scanning, less security.
• Moderately Aggressive — Even faster scanning, but even less
security.
• Very Aggressive — Fastest scan speed, but will increase the poten-
tial for misreads. The least secure setting.

Use caution when setting this feature, as the aggressive settings for this
feature allow a higher potential for misreads.
CAUTION

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on the follow-
ing pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

It is important to note that the default for this feature is the “VERY CONSER-
VATIVE” setting. For default settings for other features, see Appendix E.
NOTE

6-146 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


EAN-8 Decoding Levels — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = VERY CONSERVATIVE

EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = SLIGHTLY MORE AGGRESSIVE

Product Reference Guide 6-147


EAN-8 Decoding Levels — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = MODERATELY AGGRESSIVE

EAN-8 DECODING LEVELS = VERY AGGRESSIVE

6-148 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Other UPC/EAN Options
The following pages contain other selectable features for UPC/EAN sym-
bologies:
• UPC/EAN Reconstruction
• Price Weight Check
• Enable EAN Two Label
• Addons
• UPC-A and EAN-13 Decoding Levels

Product Reference Guide 6-149


UPC/EAN Reconstruction
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode a class of UPC/EAN
labels with voids. The label voids may be caused by printing defects or
physical damage. This feature may be helpful in environments with in-
store printed labels.

Enabling this feature increases the potential of misreads.

CAUTION

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

UPC/EAN RECONSTRUCTION = DISABLE

UPC/EAN RECONSTRUCTION = ENABLE

6-150 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Price Weight Check
Enables/disables calculation and verification of price/weight check digits.
Applies to all UPC-A and EAN/JAN-13 labels with eligible1 Number Sys-
tem/First Character digits.
Options are:
• Disable
• 4-digit price/weight
• 5-digit price/weight
• 4-digit European price/weight
• 5-digit European price/weight
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option below or on the
following pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on fac-
ing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = DISABLE

1. Price Weight Check generally applies to UPC-A labels with a Number System Digit of 2 and EAN/
JAN-13 labels with a First Character of 2. There are a total of six flag digits corresponding to the
six types. Checking applies depending upon which type is enabled.

Product Reference Guide 6-151


Price Weight Check — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 4-DIGIT PRICE/WEIGHT

PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 5-DIGIT PRICE/WEIGHT

6-152 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Price Weight Check — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 4-DIGIT EUROPEAN PRICE/WEIGHT

PRICE WEIGHT CHECK = 5-DIGIT EUROPEAN PRICE/WEIGHT

Product Reference Guide 6-153


Enable EAN Two Label
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN two-label pairs.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

Contact Customer Support for details about advanced programming for this
feature.

EAN TWO LABEL = DISABLE

EAN TWO LABEL = ENABLE

6-154 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Addons
The scanner is capable of processing different types of addon codes,
including:
• 2-Digit Supplemental
• 5-Digit Supplemental
Options are provided on the following pages for your convenience:
• Disable all addons — The scanner will not look for or read addons.
• Optional 2-Digit and 5-Digit Supplemental — Bar codes can be
read which include 2-Digit or 5-Digit Supplementals, however, it is
not required that addons be included in bar codes.

Contact customer support for advanced programming of optional and con-


ditional addons.

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on this and the
following page. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

ADDONS = DISABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-155


Addons — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

ADDONS = OPTIONAL 2-DIGIT AND 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL

6-156 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


UPC-A and EAN-13 Decoding Levels
Decoding levels allow the decoder to be set to perform at one of four
selectable levels:
• Very Conservative — Slower scan time, however, allows few, if
any, misreads. The most secure setting.
• Slightly More Aggressive — Faster scanning, less security.
• Moderately Aggressive — Even faster scanning, but even less
security.
• Very Aggressive — Fastest scan speed, but will increase the poten-
tial for misreads. The least secure setting.

Use caution when setting this feature, as the aggressive settings for this
feature allow a higher potential for misreads.
CAUTION

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code representing the desired option on the follow-
ing pages. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on facing
pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

It is important to note that the default for this feature is the “SLIGHTLY
MORE AGGRESSIVE” setting. For default settings for other features, see
Appendix E.
NOTE

Product Reference Guide 6-157


UPC-A and EAN-13 Decoding Levels — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

UPC-A/EAN-13 DECODING LEVELS = VERY CONSERVATIVE

UPC-A/EAN-13 DECODING LEVELS = SLIGHTLY MORE AGGRESSIVE

6-158 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


UPC-A and EAN-13 Decoding Levels — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

UPC-A/EAN-13 DECODING LEVELS = MODERATELY AGGRESSIVE

UPC-A/EAN-13 DECODING LEVELS = VERY AGGRESSIVE

Product Reference Guide 6-159


GTIN Enable
Enables/Disables the ability to convert UPCE, UPCA, EAN8, and
EAN13 labels into the GTIN 14-character format.

If add-on information is present on the base label prior to the conversion


taking place, the add-on information will be appended to the converted
GTIN bar code.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

GTIN = DISABLE

GTIN = ENABLE

6-160 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


GTIN Label ID
This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when
GTIN conversion is enabled.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether


the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF
(for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET GTIN LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 6-161


GTIN 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when
GTIN conversion is enabled and 2-digit supplemental addon bar code
labels are converted.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether


the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF
(for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET GTIN 2-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

6-162 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


GTIN 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when
GTIN conversion is enabled and 5-digit supplemental addon bar code
labels are converted.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether


the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL
ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF
(for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET GTIN 5-DIGIT SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 6-163


GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID
This feature specifies a GTIN label ID to be added to bar code data when
GTIN conversion is enabled and Code 128 supplemental addon bar code
labels are converted

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates whether


the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is disabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET GTIN CODE 128 SUPPLEMENTAL
LABEL ID below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this
and the facing page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF
(for each of the two characters).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET GTIN CODE 128 SUPPLEMENTAL LABEL ID

6-164 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RSS-14 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode RSS-14 labels.

This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact your


dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this advanced
capability.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RSS-14 = DISABLE

RSS-14 = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-165


RSS-14 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of the RSS-14 check character.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RSS-14 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

RSS-14 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

6-166 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RSS-14/EAN-128 Emulation
Enables/disables the ability of RSS-14 to be transmitted as EAN-128.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RSS-14/EAN-128 EMULATION = DISABLE

RSS-14/EAN-128 EMULATION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-167


RSS-14 2D Component Enable
When this feature is enabled, and the software reads an RSS-14 bar code
that has a 2D component associated with it, the RSS-14 bar code will not
be reported to the terminal.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RSS-14 2D COMPONENT = DISABLE

RSS-14 2D COMPONENT = ENABLE

6-168 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RSS-14 AIM ID
This feature enables/disables transmission of the RSS-14 AIM symbology
identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RSS-14 AIM ID = DISABLE

RSS-14 AIM ID = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-169


RSS-14 Label ID
This feature specifies an RSS-14 label ID to be added to bar code data.
To set this feature:

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RSS-14 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET RSS-14 LABEL ID

6-170 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RSS Expanded Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode RSS-Expanded labels.

This value-added feature is a factory-programmed option. Contact your


dealer for information about upgrading your system to include this advanced
capability.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RSS-EXPANDED = DISABLE

RSS-EXPANDED = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-171


RSS Expanded EAN-128 Emulation
Enables/disables EAN 128 emulation for RSS Expanded.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RSS EXPANDED/EAN-128 EMULATION = DISABLE

RSS EXPANDED/EAN-128 EMULATION = ENABLE

6-172 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RSS Expanded 2D Component Enable
When this feature is enabled, and the software reads an RSS Expanded bar
code that has a 2D component associated with it, the RSS Expanded bar
code will not be reported to the terminal.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RSS EXPANDED 2D COMPONENT = DISABLE

RSS EXPANDED 2D COMPONENT = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-173


RSS Expanded AIM ID
This feature enables/disables transmission of the RSS Expanded AIM
symbology identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

RSS EXPANDED AIM ID = DISABLE

RSS EXPANDED AIM ID = ENABLE

6-174 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RSS Expanded Label ID
This feature specifies an RSS Expanded label ID to be added to bar code
data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RSS EXPANDED LABEL ID below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET RSS EXPANDED LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 6-175


RSS Expanded Length Control
This feature specifies either variable-length or fixed-length decoding for
RSS Expanded.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features
RSS Expanded Maximum Label Length and RSS Expanded
Minimum Label Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you
must now set RSS Expanded Fixed Length 1 and RSS
NOTE Expanded Fixed Length 2.

RSS EXPANDED LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

RSS EXPANDED LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

6-176 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RSS Expanded Maximum Label Length
This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of an RSS Expanded
label.

Length in this case includes check and data characters. This applies
when RSS Expanded Length Control is set to variable-length
decoding.
Maximum Label Length should be greater than or equal to Minimum Label
NOTE Length.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RSS EXPANDED MAXIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 00 to 74. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-74).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET RSS EXPANDED MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 6-177


RSS Expanded Minimum Label Length
This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of an RSS Expanded
label.

Length in this case includes check and data characters. This applies
when RSS Expanded Length Control is set to variable-length
decoding.
Minimum Label Length should be less than or equal to Maximum Label
NOTE Length.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RSS EXPANDED MINIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 00 to 74. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-74).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET RSS EXPANDED MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH

6-178 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RSS Expanded Fixed Length 1
This feature specifies RSS Expanded first fixed length.

This applies when RSS Expanded Length Control is set to fixed-


length decoding.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RSS EXPANDED FIXED LENGTH 1
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 00 to 74. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading
zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-74).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET RSS EXPANDED FIXED LENGTH 1

Product Reference Guide 6-179


RSS Expanded Fixed Length 2
This feature specifies RSS Expanded second fixed length.

This applies when RSS Expanded Length Control is set to fixed-


length decoding.
If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET RSS EXPANDED FIXED LENGTH 2
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 00 to 74. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading
zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-74).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET RSS EXPANDED FIXED LENGTH 2

6-180 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 39 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 39 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 39 = DISABLE

CODE 39 = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-181


Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of Code 39 start and stop characters.

This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.

NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

CODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

6-182 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 39 Check Character Calculation
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Code 39 check
character. When disabled, any check character in label is treated as a data
character.

If check calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a misread can


occur.
In particular, if you are using variable length stitching, it is important to use
NOTE check character calculation to prevent misreads.

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE

CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-183


Code 39 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of optional Code 39 check character.

This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.

NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

CODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

6-184 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 39 Full ASCII
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to translate to Code 39 full
ASCII labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 39 FULL ASCII = DISABLE

CODE 39 FULL ASCII = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-185


Code 39 AIM ID
This feature enables/disables transmission of the Code 39 AIM symbology
identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 39 AIM ID = DISABLE

CODE 39 AIM ID = ENABLE

6-186 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 39 Label ID
This feature specifies a Code 39 label ID to be added to bar code data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 LABEL ID below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 39 LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 6-187


Code 39 Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for Code 39.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features
Code 39 Maximum Label Length and Code 39 Minimum Label
Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must now set Code
39 Fixed Length 1 and Code 39 Fixed Length 2.
NOTE When using variable length stitching, it is important to enable Code 39
Check Character Calculation to prevent misreads.

CODE 39 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

CODE 39 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

6-188 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 39 Maximum Label Length
This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of a Code 39 label.

Length in this case includes check, data and ASCII characters, but does
not include start, or stop characters. This feature applies when Code 39
Length Control is set to variable-length decoding.
Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label
NOTE length.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 MAXIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 00 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 39 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 6-189


Code 39 Minimum Label Length
This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of a Code 39 label.

Length in this case includes check, data and ASCII characters, but does
not include start, or stop characters. This feature applies when Code 39
Length Control is set to variable-length decoding.
Minumum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label
NOTE length.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 MINIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 00 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 39 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH

6-190 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 39 Fixed Length 1
This feature specifies Code 39 first fixed length.

This applies when Code 39 Length Control is set to fixed-length


decoding.
The minimum decodable length is four when an optional check character
NOTE is present.

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 FIXED LENGTH 1 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 00 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading
zero to yield a two-digit entry (00-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 39 FIXED LENGTH 1

Product Reference Guide 6-191


Code 39 Fixed Length 2
This feature specifies Code 39 second fixed length.

This applies when Code 39 Length Control is set to fixed-length


decoding.
If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00, then Fixed Length 1 will apply
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 39 FIXED LENGTH 2 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 00, no second fixed length, or 01 to 50. Pad all sin-
gle digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry
(00-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 39 FIXED LENGTH 2

6-192 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 39 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Code 39 labels. When parts of a Code 39
bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar
code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be
decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

CODE 39 STITCHING = DISABLE

CODE 39 STITCHING = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-193


Pharmacode 39 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Italian Pharmacode
39 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

PHARMACODE 39 = DISABLE

PHARMACODE 39 = ENABLE

6-194 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Pharmacode 39 Start Stop Character Transmission
Enables/ disables transmission of start and stop characters for Pharmacode
39.

This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.

NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

PHARMACODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

PHARMACODE 39 START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-195


Pharmacode 39 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of Pharmacode 39 check character.

This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.

NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

PHARMACODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

PHARMACODE 39 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

6-196 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Pharmacode 39 Label ID
This feature specifies a Pharmacode 39 label ID to be added to bar code
data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET PHARMACODE 39 LABEL ID below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET PHARMACODE 39 LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 6-197


Code 128 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 128 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 128 = DISABLE

CODE 128 = ENABLE

6-198 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 128 Transmit Function Characters
Enables/disables transmission of Code 128 function characters 1, 2, 3,
and 4.

Disabled is the recommended setting for all interfaces.

NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 128 TRANSMIT FUNCTION CHARACTERS = DISABLE

CODE 128 TRANSMIT FUNCTION CHARACTERS = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-199


Convert Code128 to Code 39
Enables/disables conversion of Code 128 labels to Code 39.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CONVERT CODE 128 TO CODE 39 = DISABLE

CONVERT CODE 128 TO CODE 39 = ENABLE

6-200 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 128 AIM ID
This feature enables/disables transmission of the Code 128 AIM symbol-
ogy identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 128 AIM ID = DISABLE

CODE 128 AIM ID = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-201


Code 128 Label ID
This feature specifies a Code 128 label ID to be added to bar code data..

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 LABEL ID below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 128 LABEL ID

6-202 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 128 Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for Code 128.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features
Code 128 Maximum Label Length and Code 128 Minimum
Label Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must now set
NOTE Code 128 Fixed Length 1 and Code 128 Fixed Length 2.

CODE 128 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

CODE 128 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 6-203


Code 128 Maximum Label Length
This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of a Code 128 label.

Length in this case includes function characteres and data characters,


but does not include function code change or check character. This fea-
ture applies when Code 128 Length Control is set to variable-length
decoding.
NOTE Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label
length.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 MAXIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 01 to 80. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-80).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 128 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH

6-204 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 128 Minimum Label Length
This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of a Code 128 label.

Length in this case includes function characteres and data characters, but
does not include function code change or check character. This feature
applies when Code 128 Length Control is set to variable-length
decoding.
NOTE Minumum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label
length.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 MINIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 01 to 80. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-80).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 128 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 6-205


Code 128 Fixed Length 1
This feature specifies Code 128 first fixed length.

This applies when Code 128 Length Control is set to fixed-length


decoding.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 FIXED LENGTH 1 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 01 to 80. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading
zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-80).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 128 FIXED LENGTH 1

6-206 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 128 Fixed Length 2
This feature specifies Code 128 second fixed length.

This applies when Code 128 Length Control is set to fixed-length


decoding.
If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 128 FIXED LENGTH 2 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 01 to 80. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading
zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-80).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 128 FIXED LENGTH 2

Product Reference Guide 6-207


Code 128 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Code 128 labels. When parts of a Code 128
bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar
code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be
decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

CODE 128 STITCHING = DISABLE

CODE 128 STITCHING = ENABLE

6-208 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


EAN-128 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode EAN-128 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN-128 = DISABLE

EAN-128 = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-209


EAN 128 AIM ID
This feature enables/disables transmission of the EAN 128 AIM symbol-
ogy identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

EAN 128 AIM ID = DISABLE

EAN 128 AIM ID = ENABLE

6-210 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


EAN 128 Label ID
This feature specifies an EAN 128 label ID to be added to bar code data..

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET EAN 128 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET EAN 128 LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 6-211


Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 OF 5) Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Interleaved 2 of 5
labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

I 2 OF 5 = DISABLE

I 2 OF 5 = ENABLE

6-212 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Interleaved 2
of 5 check character.

If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a mis-


read can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code are
treated as data characters.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE

I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-213


I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an optional Interleaved 2 of 5 check char-
acter.

This feature applies only when I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation


is enabled. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit,
is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

I 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

6-214 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


I 2 of 5 AIM ID
This feature enables/disables transmission of the I 2 of 5 AIM symbology
identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

I 2 of 5 AIM ID = DISABLE

I 2 of 5 AIM ID = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-215


I 2 of 5 Label ID
This feature specifies an I 2 of 5 label ID to be added to bar code data..

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 of 5 LABEL ID below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET I 2 of 5 LABEL ID

6-216 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


I 2 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for I 2 of 5.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features I 2
of 5 Maximum Label Length and I 2 of 5 Minimum Label
Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must now set I 2 of 5
NOTE Fixed Length 1 and I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2.

I 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

I 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 6-217


I 2 of 5 Maximum Label Length
This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of an I 2 of 5 label.

Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does not
include start or stop characters. This feature applies when I 2 of 5
Length Control is set to variable-length decoding.
Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label
NOTE length.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 OF 5 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 02 to 50, even numbers only. Pad all single digit
numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (02-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET I 2 OF 5 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH

6-218 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


I 2 of 5 Minimum Label Length
This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of an I 2 of 5 label.

Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does not
include start or stop characters. This feature applies when I 2 of 5
Length Control is set to variable-length decoding.
Minimum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label
NOTE length.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 OF 5 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 02 to 50, even numbers only. Pad all single digit
numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (02-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET I 2 OF 5 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 6-219


I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1
This feature specifies I 2 of 5 first fixed length.

This applies when I 2 of 5 Length Control is set to fixed-length


decoding.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 1 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 02 to 50, even numbers only. Pad all single digit
numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (02-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET I 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 1

6-220 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2
This feature specifies I 2 of 5 second fixed length.

This applies when I 2 of 5 Length Control is set to fixed-length decod-


ing.
If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET I 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 2 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 00, or 02 to 50; even numbers only. Pad all single
digit numbers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (02-
50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET I 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 2

Product Reference Guide 6-221


I 2 of 5 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for I 2 of 5 labels. When parts of an I 2 of 5 bar
code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar code
parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be
decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

I 2 of 5 Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY. I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1


and/or I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2 must be properly configured for stitching to
work.
NOTE

I 2 OF 5 STITCHING = DISABLE

I 2 OF 5 STITCHING = ENABLE

6-222 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Codabar Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Codabar labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODABAR = DISABLE

CODABAR = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-223


Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of Codabar start and stop characters.

This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.

NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

6-224 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Codabar Start Stop Character Set
This feature selects the format of transmitted Codabar start/stop charac-
ters.
Options are:
• ABCD/TN* E
• ABCD/ABCD
• abcd/tn* e
• abcd/abcd
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below or from the following page representing
the desired option. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes and
facing pages to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code
you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = ABCD/TN* E

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = ABCD/ABCD

Product Reference Guide 6-225


Codabar Start Stop Character Set — continued
Remember to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = abcd/tn* e

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER = abcd/abcd

6-226 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Codabar Start Stop Character Match
Enables/disables the requirement that start and stop characters match.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER MATCH = DISABLE

CODABAR START STOP CHARACTER MATCH = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-227


Codabar Check Character Calculation
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Codabar check
character.

If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a mis-


read can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code are
treated as data characters.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE

CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE

6-228 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Codabar Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an optional Codabar check character.

Applies only when Codabar Check Character Calculation is enabled.


This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

CODABAR CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-229


Codabar AIM ID
This feature enables/disables transmission of the Codabar AIM symbology
identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODABAR AIM ID = DISABLE

CODABAR AIM ID = ENABLE

6-230 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Codabar Label ID
This feature specifies a Codabar label ID to e added to bar code data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR LABEL ID below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODABAR LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 6-231


Codabar Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for Codabar.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features
Codabar Maximum Label Length and Codabar Minimum
Label Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must now set
NOTE Codabar Fixed Length 1 and Codabar Fixed Length 2.

CODABAR LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

CODABAR LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

6-232 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Codabar Maximum Label Length
This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of a Codabar label.

Length in this case includes start, stop or check and data characters, but
does not include full ASCII shift characters. This feature applies when
Codabar Length Control is set to variable-length decoding.
Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label
NOTE length.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR MAXIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 03 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (03-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODABAR MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 6-233


Codabar Minimum Label Length
This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of a Codabar label.

Length in this case includes start, stop or check and data characters, but
does not include full ASCII shift characters. This feature applies when
Codabar Length Control is set to variable-length decoding.
Minimum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label
NOTE length.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR MINIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 03 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (03-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODABAR MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH

6-234 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Codabar Fixed Length 1
This feature specifies Codabar first fixed length.

Length in this case includes start, stop or check and data characters, but
does not include full ASCII shift characters.
This feature applies when Codabar Length Control is set to fixed-
length decoding.
NOTE
Decodable length is four when the optional check character is present.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR FIXED LENGTH 1 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 03 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading
zero to yield a two-digit entry (03-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODABAR FIXED LENGTH 1

Product Reference Guide 6-235


Codabar Fixed Length 2
This feature specifies Codabar second fixed length.

Length in this case includes start, stop or check and data characters, but
does not include full ASCII shift characters.
This feature applies when Codabar Length Control is set to fixed-
length decoding.
NOTE Decodable length is four when the optional check character is present.
If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODABAR FIXED LENGTH 2 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 00, or 03 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (03-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODABAR FIXED LENGTH 2

6-236 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Codabar Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Codabar labels. When parts of a Codabar
bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar
code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be
decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

Codabar Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY. Codabar Fixed


Length 1 and/or Codabar Fixed Length 2 must be properly configured for
stitching to work.
NOTE

CODABAR STITCHING = DISABLE

CODABAR STITCHING = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-237


Code 93 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Code 93 labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 93 = DISABLE

CODE 93 = ENABLE

6-238 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 93 AIM ID
This feature enables/disables transmission of the Code 93 AIM symbology
identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

CODE 93 AIM ID = DISABLE

CODE 93 AIM ID = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-239


Code 93 Label ID
This feature specifies a Code 93 label ID to be added to bar code data..

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 LABEL ID below. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 93 LABEL ID

6-240 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 93 Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for Code 93.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features
Code 93 Maximum Label Length and Code 93 Minimum Label
Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must now set Code 93
NOTE Fixed Length 1 and Code 93 Fixed Length 2.

CODE 93 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

CODE 93 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 6-241


Code 93 Maximum Label Length
This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of a Code 93 label.

Length in this case includes data characters, but does not include start,
stop, full ASCII shift, or check characters. This feature applies when
Code 93 Length Control is set to variable-length decoding.
Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label
NOTE length.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 MAXIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 93 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH

6-242 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 93 Minimum Label Length
This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of a Code 93 label.

Length in this case includes data characters, but does not include start,
stop, full ASCII shift, or check characters. This feature applies when
Code 93 Length Control is set to variable-length decoding.
Minimum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label
NOTE length.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 MINIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 93 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 6-243


Code 93 Fixed Length 1
This feature specifies Code 93 first fixed length.

This applies when Code 93 Length Control is set to fixed-length


decoding.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 FIXED LENGTH 1 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading
zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 93 FIXED LENGTH 1

6-244 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 93 Fixed Length 2
This feature specifies Code 93 second fixed length.

This applies when Code 93 Length Control is set to fixed-length


decoding.
If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET CODE 93 FIXED LENGTH 2 below.
You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing
page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend
to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 00, or 01 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a
leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET CODE 93 FIXED LENGTH 2

Product Reference Guide 6-245


Code 93 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Code 93 labels. When parts of a Code 93
bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the bar
code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data will be
decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

CODE 93 STITCHING = DISABLE

CODE 93 STITCHING = ENABLE

6-246 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


MSI/Plessey Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode MSI/Plessey labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

MSI/PLESSEY = DISABLE

MSI/PLESSEY = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-247


MSI/Plessey Check Character Calculation
Enables/disables calculation and verification of optional MSI/Plessey
check characters.

If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a mis-


read can occur. When disabled, any check characters in a bar code are
treated as data characters.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE

MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE

6-248 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


MSI/Plessey Number of Check Characters
Specifies number of MSI/Plessey check characters to be calculated and
verified.

Check characters are always modulus 10.

NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code below representing the desired number of MSI/
Plessey check characters to be calculated and verified. You’ll need
to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to
scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

MSI/PLESSEY NUMBER OF CHECK CHARACTERS = 1

MSI/PLESSEY NUMBER OF CHECK CHARACTERS = 2

Product Reference Guide 6-249


MSI/Plessey Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of optional MSI/Plessey check characters.

This feature applies only when MSI/Plessey Check Character Calcu-


lation is enabled. This item is ignored when the advanced feature, Full
Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to
cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure
that the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

MSI/PLESSEY CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

6-250 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


MSI/Plessey AIM ID
This feature enables/disables transmission of the MSI/Plessey AIM sym-
bology identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

MSI/PLESSEY AIM ID = DISABLE

MSI/PLESSEY AIM ID = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-251


MSI/Plessey Label ID
This feature specifies an MSI/Plessey label ID to be added to bar code
data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is dis-
abled.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY LABEL ID below. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex
pairs. A table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corre-
sponding Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this
manual. ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of
hexadecimal digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character
value of AB, bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’
must be scanned. The selectable range for this option is any hex
value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET MSI/PLESSEY LABEL ID

6-252 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


MSI/Plessey Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for MSI/Plessey.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features
MSI/Plessey Maximum Label Length and MSI/Plessey Mini-
mum Label Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you must
now set I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 and MSI/Plessey Fixed Length
NOTE 2.

MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

MSI/PLESSEY LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 6-253


MSI/Plessey Maximum Label Length
This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of an MSI/Plessey
label.

Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does not
include start, stop or full ASCII shift characters. This feature applies when
MSI/Plessey Length Control is set to variable-length decoding.
Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum label
NOTE length.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY MAXIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 4 to 16. Pad all single digit numbers with a lead-
ing zero to yield a two-digit entry (04-16).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET MSI/PLESSEY MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH

6-254 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


MSI/Plessey Minimum Label Length
This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of an MSI/Plessey
label.

Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does not
include start, stop or full ASCII shift characters. This applies when MSI/
Plessey Length Control is set to variable-length decoding.
Minimum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label
NOTE length.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY MINIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on
this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the
bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range
for this option is 4 to 16. Pad all single digit numbers with a lead-
ing zero to yield a two-digit entry (04-16).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET MSI/PLESSEY MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 6-255


MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 1
This feature specifies MSI/Plessey first fixed length.

This applies when MSI/Plessey Length


Control is set to fixed-length decoding.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY FIXED LENGTH 1
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 4 to 16. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading
zero to yield a two-digit entry (04-16).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET MSI/PLESSEY FIXED LENGTH 1

6-256 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 2
This feature specifies MSI/Plessey second fixed length.

This applies when MSI/Plessey Length Control is set to fixed-length


decoding.
If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply.
NOTE
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET MSI/PLESSEY FIXED LENGTH 2
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the
facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that
represent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for
this option is 0 (zero), or 4 to 16. Pad all single digit numbers
with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (00, 04-16).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET MSI/PLESSEY FIXED LENGTH 2

Product Reference Guide 6-257


MSI/Plessey Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for MSI/Plessey labels. When parts of an MSI/
Plessey bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled, the
bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data
will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that
the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

MSI/Plessey Stitching operates using fixed lengths ONLY. MSI/Plessey


Fixed Length 1 and/or MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 2 must be properly con-
figured for stitching to work.
NOTE

MSI/PLESSEY STITCHING = DISABLE

MSI/PLESSEY STITCHING = ENABLE

6-258 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Standard 2 of 5 Enable
Enables/disables the ability of the scanner to decode Standard 2 of 5
labels.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

STANDARD 2 OF 5 = DISABLE

STANDARD 2 OF 5 = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-259


Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation
Enables/disables calculation and verification of an optional Standard 2 of
5 check character.

If check character calculation is disabled, the risk is increased that a mis-


read can occur. When disabled, any check character in a bar code is
treated as data character.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = DISABLE

STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER CALCULATION = ENABLE

6-260 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission
Enables/disables transmission of an optional Standard 2 of 5 check charac-
ter.

This feature applies only when Standard 2 of 5 Check Charac-


ter Calculation is enabled. This item is ignored when the advanced
feature, Full Label Edit, is enabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan either the enable or disable bar code below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = DISABLE

STANDARD 2 of 5 CHECK CHARACTER TRANSMISSION = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-261


Standard 2 of 5 AIM ID
This feature enables/disables transmission of the Standard 2 of 5 AIM
symbology identifier.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

STANDARD 2 of 5 AIM ID = DISABLE

STANDARD 2 of 5 AIM ID = ENABLE

6-262 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Standard 2 of 5 Label ID
This feature specifies an Standard 2 of 5 label ID to be added to bar code
data.

The programming feature, RS-232 Label ID Control, designates


whether the Label ID is transmitted as a prefix or suffix or if Label ID is
disabled.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 of 5 LABEL ID below. You’ll
need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to
ensure the scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired Label ID characters; entered as two hex pairs. A
table containing the ASCII Character Set and their corresponding
Hex Values is available in the inside back cover of this manual.
ASCII parameters must be input by scanning a pair of hexadecimal
digits for each character. Thus, to set a two-character value of AB,
bar codes containing the digits ‘4’, ‘1’, ‘4’, and ‘2’ must be scanned.
The selectable range for this option is any hex value from 00 to FF.
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET STANDARD 2 of 5 LABEL ID

Product Reference Guide 6-263


Standard 2 of 5 Length Control
This feature specifies whether variable-length or fixed-length decoding
will be set for Standard 2 of 5.
To set this feature:
1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
3. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.
If variable-length control was selected, you must now set the features
Standard 2 of 5 Maximum Label Length and Standard 2 of 5
Minimum Label Length. If fixed-length control was selected, you
must now set Standard 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 and Standard 2
NOTE of 5 Fixed Length 2.

STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = VARIABLE-LENGTH

STANDARD 2 OF 5 LENGTH CONTROL = FIXED-LENGTH

6-264 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Standard 2 of 5 Maximum Label Length
This feature specifies the maximum allowable length of a Standard 2 of 5
label.
Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does
not include start or stop characters. This feature applies when
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control is set to variable-length
decoding.

NOTE Maximum label length should be greater than or equal to minimum


label length.

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 MAXIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this
and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired maximum label length. The selectable range for
this option is 01 to 50, even numbers only. Pad all single digit num-
bers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 MAXIMUM LABEL LENGTH

Product Reference Guide 6-265


Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Label Length
This feature specifies the minimum allowable length of an Standard 2 of 5
label.
Length in this case includes check and data characters, but does not
include start or stop characters. This feature applies when Standard
2 of 5 Length Control is set to variable-length decoding.

NOTE Minimum label length should be less than or equal to maximum label
length.

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 MINIMUM LABEL
LENGTH below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this
and the facing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar
code you intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired minimum label length. The selectable range for
this option is 01 to 50, even numbers only. Pad all single digit num-
bers with a leading zero to yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 MINIMUM LABEL LENGTH

6-266 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Standard 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1
This feature specifies Standard 2 of 5 first fixed length.

This applies when Standard 2 of 5 Length Control is set to


fixed-length decoding.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 1
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the fac-
ing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this
option is 1 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to
yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 1

Product Reference Guide 6-267


Standard 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2
This feature specifies Standard 2 of 5 second fixed length.

This applies when Standard 2 of 5 Length Control is set to fixed-


length decoding.

NOTE If Fixed Length 2 is set to 00 (zero), then Fixed Length 1 will apply.

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan the bar code, SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 2
below. You’ll need to cover any unused bar codes on this and the fac-
ing page to ensure that the scanner reads only the bar code you
intend to scan.
3. Scan the appropriate digits from the keypad in Appendix C that rep-
resent the desired fixed label length. The selectable range for this
option is 1 to 50. Pad all single digit numbers with a leading zero to
yield a two-digit entry (01-50).
4. Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH
bar code.

SET STANDARD 2 OF 5 FIXED LENGTH 2

6-268 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Standard 2 of 5 Stitching
Enables/disables stitching for Standard 2 of 5 labels. When parts of a Stan-
dard 2 of 5 bar code are presented to the scanner with this feature enabled,
the bar code parts will be assembled by the scanner’s software, and the data
will be decoded if all bar code proofing requirements are met.

This applies when Standard 2 of 5 Length Control is set to fixed-


length decoding.
NOTE

To set this feature:


1. Scan the SWITCH bar code.
2. Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover
any unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the
scanner reads only the bar code you intend to scan.
Complete the programming sequence by scanning the SWITCH bar
code.

STANDARD 2 OF 5 STITCHING = DISABLE

STANDARD 2 OF 5 STITCHING = ENABLE

Product Reference Guide 6-269


NOTES

6-270 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Appendix A
LED/Beeper Indications & Controls
Figure A-1 shows the operator’s controls and indicators. The descriptions
following identify the use or function of each component.
Figure A-1. Scanner and Scale Controls

Green LED

Yellow LED
Volume/Tone
Push Button

Scale Zero
Push Button

Controls and Indicators


The control panel consists of two indicator LEDs and two push buttons as
described in the following pages.

Product Reference Guide A-1


Indicator LEDs
The green LED indicates scanner status, and the yellow LED is primarily
used to show scale status as described in Table A-1 below:
Table A-1. Green and Yellow LED Functions

LED
DURATION COMMENT
INDICATION

Yellow LED on steady The scale is at rest and reads zero weight. The
Scale at Zeroa scale is ready to weigh.

Scanner Activea Green LED on steady and dim The scanner is ready for operation. Scanning is
(Normal Mode) immediately available.

Good Read Green LED - bright flash


Indicates a bar code has been read and decoded.
Indicationa

Program Mode Green LED - Continuous flashing Indicates the scanner is in Label Programming
Indication Mode. Cycle power to exit Programming Mode.

The scanner motor and/or laser have automati-


Sleep Mode Green LED blinks at a 2-second rate
cally switched off and the unit has entered Sleep
Indication
Mode due to extended inactivity.

1-second off, 1/10-second on


Host Disabled Host has disabled scanning.

Serves notice that a fatal FRU failure has been


Audible low tone 3 seconds.
Field Replace- detected. Consult Error Codes in Section 4 for
Alternating Green/Yellow LED flashes
able Unit (FRU) more details. If a low tone is heard, but continuous
continuously.
Warning (Error flashing is not observed, the scanner can still func-
Mode) tion in a limited capacity. Call systems support for
service in either case.

Green LED flashes a coded


sequence in concert with the speaker. Occurs ONLY upon Volume/Tone button push fol-
FRU Indication lowing a FRU warning. Enables service techni-
cians to identify FRU failures.

a. Certain functions of the Green and Yellow LEDs are selectable to be enabled or disabled. Your scanner may
not be programmed to display all indications.

A-2 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Volume/Tone Push Button
The Volume/Tone Push Button also performs multiple functions depend-
ing upon the duration of time it is pressed:

Volume changes made using the Volume/Tone Push Button are lost when the
scanner is powered-down and are reset to the factory default setting. If you
wish to permanently change the volume, use the special programming labels
NOTE in Section 6, Programming.

If your scanner emits rapid clicking sounds, it may mean you’ve accidentally
initiated an advanced diagnostic mode used by factory service techicians. To
exit this mode, reset the scanner by cycling power or pressing the Volume/
NOTE Tone Push Button for ten seconds or longer.

Product Reference Guide A-3


Table A-2. Volume/Tone Push Button Functions

PRESS
FUNCTION COMMENT
DURATION

Alternatively, the scanner can be awakened by:


- Moving an object through the scan zone.
Momentary (when Wakes scanner from Sleep
- A weight change on the scale.
scanner is asleep) Mode
- Changing the ambient light.
- Scanning with an attached auxiliary scanner.

Press the push button momentarily to increase speaker


volume. When the loudest volume is reached, a
Momentary (when
Increments volume repeated press of the push button cycles volume back
scanner is awake)
to the lowest setting, then volume increases on subse-
quent press(es). Five volume levels are available.

Press the push button for approximately 2 seconds,


Hold, then release
then release. Each time this is done, the beeper will
when the beeper Increments tone
sound at one of three tones. Stop when the desired
sounds
tone (high, medium or low) is sounded.
This mode allows system support personnel to trouble-
shoot problems with the scanner. Upon entering Scan-
ner Diagnostic Mode, view the 7-segment display to
view Interface Type, Bootloader Version Number, Appli-
5 Seconds Scanner Diagnostics Modea cation Version Number and Configuration File Number.
This mode is used to determine if a scanner can read
bar codes. Press the button for eight seconds or cycle
power to exit Scanner Diagnostics Mode and reset the
scanner.

10 Seconds Resets Scannerb Only system support personnel should perform a reset.

a. By standard default, this function is normally disabled to prevent accidental activation by users.
b. Users should not perform scanner resets except under the direction of systems support personnel.

A-4 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Scale Zero Push Button
The Scale Zero Push Button is used for multiple functions as listed in
Table A-3.

The Scale Zero Push Button has no function in a “scanner only” model.

NOTE
Table A-3. Scale Zero Push Button Functions

PRESS
FUNCTION COMMENT
DURATION

When programmed to do so, the yellow LED should be lit when no


weight is on the scale, indicating scale at zero. If it is not, press the
Momentary Zero Scale
switch to zero the scale. The unit will sound a “click” upon pressing
the button.

This mode allows system support personnel to troubleshoot prob-


Scale Diagnostics
4 Seconds lems with the scale. Momentarily press the Scale Zero Push Button
Modea
or cycle power to exit Scale Diagnostics Mode.

a. Diagnostics Mode is meant for use by trained systems support personnel. Users should not need to ini-
tiate this function under normal circumstances.

Calibration Switch
This switch initiates the scale’s calibration routine. A certified weight set is
needed to perform the scale calibration steps detailed in Section 5, Cali-
bration. This switch is not included in scanners without scale modules.

Product Reference Guide A-5


Calibration Switch Seal
This seal allows you to secure the Calibration Switch and restrict access to
it. If the calibration seal is broken or missing, you may be prohibited from
operating the scale without recertification. Check local and state require-
ments for specific restrictions.

There are regulations that must be followed in order to ensure compli-


LEGAL NOTE ance when operating a weighing device such as the scanner/scale. Fail-
ure to observe and comply with these regulations could result in legal
LEGAL NOTE action.

A-6 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Appendix B
Cable Information
Introduction
The following pages contain pinout information, enabling you to create
standard interface cables for use in interconnecting the scanner, scale,
external handheld scanner, and POS terminal.

General Specifications
Wire Requirements
• Cable length should not exceed 15 feet.
• Wire gauge = Standard for RJ-45 connectors (28-26 AWG).
• If run exceeds 15 feet, we recommend 26 AWG wire size.

Product Reference Guide B-1


RS-232 Cable Pinout
Scanner
Connector Hardware
RJ45, 10 Position
Cable Pinout

Table B-1. RS-232 Cable Pinouts

PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

1 +5V pullup +5V pullup

2 CTS in Clear To Send (input)


3 N/C No Connection

4 RTS out Request To Send (output)

5 RxD in Receive Data (Input)

6 TxD out Transmit Data (output)

7 N/C No Connection

8 +5V out +5V out

9 GND Signal Ground


10 N/C No Connection

B-2 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


RS-232 Cable Pinout — continued
Scale
Connector Hardware
RJ45, 10 Position
Cable Pinout

Table B-2.

PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

1 +5V pullup +5V pullup

2 CTS IN Clear To Send (input)

3 N/C No Connection

4 RTS OUT Request To Send (output)

5 RxD IN Receive Data (Input)

6 TxD OUT Transmit Data (output)

7 N/C No Connection

8 +5V out +5V out


9 Gnd Signal Ground

10 N/C No Connection

Product Reference Guide B-3


IBM Cable Pinout
Scanner and Scale
Connector Hardware
RJ45, 10 Position
Cable Pinout

Table B-3

PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

1 +5V pullup +5V pullup

2 N/C No Connection

3 N/C No Connection

4 Serial I/O B Serial Data -

5 N/C No Connection

6 Serial I/O A Serial Data +

7 N/C No Connection

8 +5V out +5V out

9 Ground Signal Ground

10 N/C No Connection

B-4 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


IBM USB Cable Pinout
Scanner and Scale
Connector Hardware
RJ45, 10 Position
Cable Pinout

Table B-4

PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

1 +5V pullup +5V pullup

2 N/C No Connection
3 N/C No Connection

4 USB D- USB D-

5 N/C No Connection

6 USB D+ USB D+

7 N/C No Connection

8 +5V out +5V out

9 GND Signal Ground


10 N/C No Connection

Product Reference Guide B-5


Auxiliary Port
External Handheld Input
Connector Hardware
RJ45, 10 Position
Cable Pinout

Table B-5

PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

1 +5V pullup +5V pullup

2 CTS in Clear To Send (input)


3 N/C No Connection - Reserved

4 RTS out Request To Send (output)

5 RxD in Receive Data (Input)

6 TxD out Transmit Data (output)

7 N/C No Connection

8 +5V out (500mA max) +5V out

9 GND Signal Ground


10 N/C No Connection

B-6 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


EAS Interlock Connector
Scanner and Scale

Antenna Connections. Connect ONLY using approved cables approved by


the manufacturer for this product.
NOTE

Connector Hardware
RJ-4
Cable Pinout

Table B-6

PIN # SIGNAL

1 GND

2 +5V Out

3 EAS Out

4 Speaker Outa

a. The “Speaker Out” line is an analog signal (5Vpp


max), connected to one of the internal speaker termi-
nals, intended to connect to an external amplifier to
drive an external speaker.

Product Reference Guide B-7


Power Cable
Connector Hardware
6 pin Molex
Cable Pinout

Table B-7

PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

1 EARTH GND Earth Ground

2 SIGNAL GND Signal Ground

3 +5V IN +5V in

4 N/C No Connection

5 N/C No Connection

6 +12V IN +12V in

Remote Display
Connector Hardware
4 pin SDL
Cable Pinout

Table B-8

PIN # FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

1 +12V OUT +12V out

2 LINE_A_DSPLY LINE A Display

3 LINE_B_DSPLY LINE B Display

4 GND Ground

B-8 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Appendix C
Keypad
Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Product Reference Guide C-1


Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

C-2 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Product Reference Guide C-3


Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

C-4 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Product Reference Guide C-5


Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

C-6 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

Product Reference Guide C-7


Use the bar codes in this section to enter numbers and characters as you
would select digits/characters from a keypad.
Scan your selection from the bar codes below. You’ll need to cover any
unused bar codes on this and the facing page to ensure that the scanner
reads only the bar code you intend to scan.

C-8 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Appendix D
Host Commands
Accepting Commands from an RS-232
Scanner Host
The scanner responds to the following RS-232 commands:

COMMAND ASCII HEX COMMENT

Enable Scanner E 0x45

Disable Scanner D 0x44

Reset Scanner R 0x52

Not On File Indication F 0x46 Long series of beeps

Beep Good Read Tone B 0x42 Beeps if Good Read Beep is enabled
Force Good Read Tone 0x01 Beeps regardless of beep setting

Bel 0x07 Force Good Read Tone

Identification request i 0x69 Returns long responsea

Health request h 0x68 Returns long responsea

Status request s 0x73 Returns long responsea

a. Call Tech Support for information.

If one of the above commands is received, the scanner will perform the
steps indicated for the command. Host commands for other interfaces is
also available. Contact Tech Support for more details.

Product Reference Guide D-1


NOTES

D-2 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Appendix E
Factory Defaults
The following table provides a listing of the most common factory settings
for the interfaces shown.
Table 5-1. Factory Default Settings
Wincor- Single
Aux RS-232 IBM 17 IBM USB
Nixdorf Cable

60 60 60 60 60 60
Double Read Timeout
(600ms) (600ms) (600ms) (600ms) (600ms) (600ms)

Laser Timeout 20 (5 min.) 20 (5 min.) 20 (5 min.) 20 (5 min.) 20 (5 min.) 20 (5 min.)

40 40 40 40 40 40
Motor Timeout
(10 min.) (10 min.) (10 min.) (10 min.) (10 min.) (10 min.)

Green LED Idle State 2 (on dim) 2 (on dim) 2 (on dim) 2 (on dim) 2 (on dim) 2 (on dim)

1 1 1 1 1 1
Scanner Button Options (vol/tone/ (vol/tone/ (vol/tone/ (vol/tone/ (vol/tone/ (vol/tone/
reset) reset) reset) reset) reset) reset)

Power-up Beep Control 1 beep 1 beep 1 beep 1 beep 1 beep 1 beep

Good Read Beep Con-


1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
trol

Good Read Beep Fre- 1 1 1 1 1 1


quency (medium) (medium) (medium) (medium) (medium) (medium)

Good Read Beep


8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms) 8 (80ms)
Length

Good Read Beep Vol- 3 (med- 3 (med- 3 (med- 3 (med- 3 (med- 3 (med-
ume high) high) high) high) high) high)

Good Read When to 0 (after 0 (after 0 (after 0 (after 0 (after 0 (after


Indicate decode) decode) decode) decode) decode) decode)

Scale Enable 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)


Scale Country Mode 0 (US) 0 (US) 0 (US) 0 (US) 0 (US) 0 (US)

Product Reference Guide E-1


Wincor- Single
Aux RS-232 IBM 17 IBM USB
Nixdorf Cable

Scale Enforced Zero


0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Return

7 (RS-232
4 (RS-232 4 (RS-232 4 (RS-232 1 (IBM 3
Scale Interface Type single
SASI) SASI) SASI) Port 17) (IBM USB)
cable)

Scale Motion Level Fil-


0 (low) 0 (low) 0 (low) 0 (low) 0 (low) 0 (low)
ter

Scale LED Enable 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)


Remote Display —
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
Enable/Disable

0 (active 0 (active 0 (active 0 (active 0 (active 0 (active


EAS Active State
low) low) low) low) low) low)

EAS Timeout 2 (20ms) 2 (20ms) 2 (20ms) 2 (20ms) 2 (20ms) 2 (20ms)

Aux Port Mode 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)


Productivity Index
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Reporting (PIR)

Maximum Host-Trans-
0 (no limit) 0 (no limit) 0 (no limit) 0 (no limit) 0 (no limit) 0 (no limit)
mitted Message Length

Number of Host Trans- 1 1 1 1 0 0


mission Buffers (2 buffers) (2 buffers) (2 buffers) (2 buffers) (1 buffer) (1 buffer)

Global Prefix ("") ("") ("") ("")

0D00 0D00
Global Suffix 0D00("") ("")
("\0D") ("\0D")

IBM Scale Address 110

IBM Transmit Labels in


0 (disable)
Code 39 Format

IBM USB Scanner 0 (fixed


Device Type scanner)

RS-232 Baud Rate 0 (19200) 1 (9600) 1 (9600) 1 (9600)

E-2 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Wincor- Single
Aux RS-232 IBM 17 IBM USB
Nixdorf Cable

RS-232 Number of Data 1 (8 data 1 (8 data 1 (8 data 0 (7 data


Bits bits) bits) bits) bits)

RS-232 Number of Stop 0 (1 stop 0 (1 stop 0 (1 stop 0 (1 stop


Bits bit) bit) bit) bit)

RS-232 Parity 0 (none) 0 (none) 2 (odd) 2 (odd)

RS-232 Hardware Con- 1 (enable


0 (disable) 0 (disable)
trol CTS flow)

RS-232 Intercharacter
0 (none) 0 (none) 0 (none)
Delay

RS-232 Software Flow


0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Control

RS-232 Host Echo 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

RS-232 Host Echo


1 (10ms) 1 (10ms)
Quiet Interval

RS-232 Ignore Host


0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Commands

0 (normal 0 (normal
RS-232 TTL
RS-232) RS-232)

RS-232 TTL Invert 0 (disable) 0 (disable)


RS-232 Beep on ASCII
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
BEL

RS-232 Beep After


1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable)
Weigh

RS-232 Beep on Not on


1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
File

RS-232 ACK NAK


0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Enable

RS-232 ACK Character 6 (ACK) 6 (ACK) 6 (ACK)

RS-232 NAK Character 21 (NAK) 21 (NAK) 21 (NAK)

Product Reference Guide E-3


Wincor- Single
Aux RS-232 IBM 17 IBM USB
Nixdorf Cable

RS-232 Retry on ACK


1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
NAK Timeout

RS-232 ACK NAK Tim-


1 (200ms) 1 (200ms) 1 (200ms)
eout Value

RS-232 ACK NAK Retry


3 resets 3 resets 3 resets
Count

RS-232 ACK NAK Error 0 (ignore 0 (ignore 0 (ignore


Handling errors) errors) errors)

RS-232 Label ID Con- 1 (enable 1 (enable 1 (enable 1 (enable


trol as prefix) as prefix) as prefix) as prefix)

Single Cable RS-232 0 (scan-


Scanner Only Protocol ner-scale)

Single Cable RS-232


Option 5
RTS CTS Selection

Single Cable RS-232


0 (disable)
Use BCC

Single Cable RS-232


0 (disable)
Use ACK/NAK

Single Cable RS-232


1 (enable)
Use STX

Set Single Cable RS-


83 (S)
232 STX Character

Single Cable RS-232


1 (enable)
Use ETX

Set Single Cable RS-


13 (CR)
232 ETX Character

Single Cable RS-232 0 (std


PSC Extensions protocol)

UPC-A Enable 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)

E-4 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Wincor- Single
Aux RS-232 IBM 17 IBM USB
Nixdorf Cable

UPC-A Number Sys-


tem Character Trans- 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
mission

UPC-A Check Charac-


1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
ter Transmission

Expand UPC-A to EAN-


0 (disable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
13

UPC/EAN AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

UPC-A Label ID 4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A")

UPC-A 2-Digit Supple-


4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A")
mental Label ID

UPC-A 5-Digit Supple-


4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A")
mental Label ID

UPC-A 128 Supplemen-


4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A")
tal Label ID

UPC-E Enable 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)

UPC-E Number Sys-


tem Character Trans- 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
mission

UPC-E Check Charac-


0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
ter Transmission

Expand UPC-E to UPC-


0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
A

Expand UPC-E to EAN-


0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
13

UPC-E Label ID 4500("E") 4500("E") 4300("C") 4500("E")

UPC-E 2-Digit Supple-


4500("E") 4500("E") 4300("C") 4500("E")
mental Label ID

UPC-E 5-Digit Supple-


4500("E") 4500("E") 4300("C") 4500("E")
mental Label ID

Product Reference Guide E-5


Wincor- Single
Aux RS-232 IBM 17 IBM USB
Nixdorf Cable

UPC-E 128 Supplemen-


4500("E") 4500("E") 4300("C") 4500("E")
tal Label ID

EAN-13 Enable 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)

EAN-13 First Character


1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
Transmission

EAN-13 Check Charac-


1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
ter Transmission

EAN-13 ISBN Conver-


0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
sion Enable

EAN 13 Label ID 4600("F") 4600("F") 4100("A") 4600("F")

EAN-13 2-Digit Supple-


4600("F") 4600("F") 4100("A") 4600("F")
mental Label ID

EAN-13 5-Digit Supple-


4600("F") 4600("F") 4100("A") 4600("F")
mental Label ID

EAN-13 128 Supple-


4600("F") 4600("F") 4100("A") 4600("F")
mental Label ID

Bookland AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

Bookland Label ID 4900 ("I") 4900 ("I") 4100 ("A") 4900 ("I")
EAN-8 Enable 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)

EAN-8 Check Character


1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
Transmission

Expand EAN-8 to EAN-


0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
13

4646 4646 4646


EAN 8 Label ID 4200 ("B")
("FF") ("FF") ("FF")

EAN-8 2-Digit Supple- 4646 4646 4646


4200 ("B")
mental Label ID ("FF") ("FF") ("FF")

EAN-8 5-Digit Supple- 4646 4646 4646


4200 ("B")
mental Label ID ("FF") ("FF") ("FF")

E-6 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Wincor- Single
Aux RS-232 IBM 17 IBM USB
Nixdorf Cable

EAN-8 128 Supplemen- 4646 4646 4646


4200 ("B")
tal Label ID ("FF") ("FF") ("FF")

1 (Very 1 (Very 1 (Very 1 (Very 1 (Very 1 (Very


EAN-8 Decoding Levels Conserva- Conserva- Conserva- Conserva- Conserva- Conserva-
tive) tive) tive) tive) tive) tive)

UPC/EAN Reconstruc-
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
tion

Price Weight Check 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)


Enable EAN Two Label 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

Addons Disable All Disable All Disable All Disable All Disable All Disable All

2 (Slightly 2 (Slightly 2 (Slightly 2 (Slightly 2 (Slightly 2 (Slightly


UPC-A and EAN-13
More More More More More More
Decoding Levels
Aggresive) Aggresive) Aggresive) Aggresive) Aggresive) Aggresive)

RSS-14 Enable 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)


RSS-14 Check Charac-
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
ter Transmission

RSS-14/EAN-128 Emu-
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
lation

RSS-14 2D Compo-
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
nent Enable

RSS-14 AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

5234 5234 5234


RSS-14 Label ID 4500 ("E")
("R4") ("R4") ("R4")

RSS Expanded Enable 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

RSS Expanded EAN-


0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
128 Emulation

RSS Expanded 2D
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Component Enable

RSS Expanded AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

Product Reference Guide E-7


Wincor- Single
Aux RS-232 IBM 17 IBM USB
Nixdorf Cable

RSS Expanded Label 5258 5258 5258


4500 ("E")
ID ("RX") ("RX") ("RX")

RSS Expanded Length 0 0 0 0 0 0


Control (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable)

RSS Expanded Maxi-


74 74 74 74 74 74
mum Label Length

RSS Expanded Mini-


1 1 1 1 1 1
mum Label Length

RSS Expanded Fixed


8 8 8 8 8 8
Length 1

RSS Expanded Fixed


14 14 14 14 14 14
Length 2

Code 39 Enable 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)

Code 39 Start Stop


0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Character Transmission

Code 39 Check Charac-


0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
ter Calculation

Code 39 Check Charac-


1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
ter Transmission

Code 39 Full ASCII 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)


Code 39 AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

4D00 4231
Code 39 Label ID 2A00 ("*") 2A00 ("*")
("M") ("B1")

0 0 0 0 0 0
Code 39 Length Control
(variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable)

Code 39 Maximum
50 50 50 50 50 50
Label Length

Code 39 Minimum
2 2 2 2 2 2
Label Length

E-8 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Wincor- Single
Aux RS-232 IBM 17 IBM USB
Nixdorf Cable

Code 39 Fixed Length 1 8 8 8 8 8 8

Code 39 Fixed Length 2 14 14 14 14 14 14

Code 39 Stitching 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)

Pharmacode 39 Enable 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

Pharmacode 39 Start
Stop Character Trans- 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
mission

Pharmacode 39 Check
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
Character Transmission

Pharmacode 39 Label
4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A") 4100("A")
ID

Code 128 Enable 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)

Code 128 Transmit


0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Function Characters

Convert Code128 to
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Code 39

Code 128 AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

4233
Code 128 Label ID 2300 ("#") 2300 ("#") 4B00 ("K")
("B3")

Code 128 Length Con- 0 0 0 0 0 0


trol (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable)

Code 128 Maximum


80 80 80 80 80 80
Label Length

Code 128 Minimum


2 2 2 2 2 2
Label Length

Code 128 Fixed Length


8 8 8 8 8 8
1

Code 128 Fixed Length


14 14 14 14 14 14
2

Product Reference Guide E-9


Wincor- Single
Aux RS-232 IBM 17 IBM USB
Nixdorf Cable

Code 128 Stitching 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)

EAN-128 Enable 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

EAN 128 AIM ID 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable)

EAN 128 Label ID 0000 ("") 0000 ("") 5000 ("P") 0000 ("")

Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
OF 5) Enable

I 2 of 5 Check Character
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Calculation

I 2 of 5 Check Character
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
Transmission

I 2 of 5 AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

4232
I 2 of 5 Label ID 6900 ("i") 6900 ("i") 4900 ("I")
("B2")

0 0 0 0 0 0
I 2 of 5 Length Control
(variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable)

I 2 of 5 Maximum Label
50 50 50 50 50 50
Length

I 2 of 5 Minimum Label
6 6 6 6 6 6
Length

I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 10 10 10 10 10 10

I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2 0 0 0 0 0 0
I 2 of 5 Stitching 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

Codabar Enable 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

Codabar Start Stop


0 (disable) 0 (disable) 1 (enable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Character Transmission

Codabar Start Stop 3 (abcd/ 3 (abcd/ 3 (abcd/ 3 (abcd/ 3 (abcd/ 3 (abcd/


Character Set abcd) abcd) abcd) abcd) abcd) abcd)

E-10 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Wincor- Single
Aux RS-232 IBM 17 IBM USB
Nixdorf Cable

Codabar Start Stop


0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Character Match

Codabar Check Char-


0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
acter Calculation

Codabar Check Char-


1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
acter Transmission

Codabar AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)


Codabar Label ID 2500 ("%") 2500 ("%") 4E00 ("N") 2500 ("%")

0 0 0 0 0 0
Codabar Length Control
(variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable)

Codabar Maximum
50 50 50 50 50 50
Label Length

Codabar Minimum
8 8 8 8 8 8
Label Length

Codabar Fixed Length 1 8 8 8 8 8 8

Codabar Fixed Length 2 14 14 14 14 14 14

Codabar Stitching 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)


Code 93 Enable 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

Code 93 AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

Code 93 Label ID 2600 ("&") 2600 ("&") 4C00 ("L") 2600 ("&")
0 0 0 0 0 0
Code 93 Length Control
(variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable)

Code 93 Maximum
50 50 50 50 50 50
Label Length

Code 93 Minimum
2 2 2 2 2 2
Label Length

Code 93 Fixed Length 1 8 8 8 8 8 8


Code 93 Fixed Length 2 14 14 14 14 14 14

Product Reference Guide E-11


Wincor- Single
Aux RS-232 IBM 17 IBM USB
Nixdorf Cable

Code 93 Stitching 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)

MSI/Plessey Enable 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

MSI/Plessey Check
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
Character Calculation

MSI/Plessey Number of 0 (1 check 0 (1 check 0 (1 check 0 (1 check


Check Characters char) char) char) char)

MSI/Plessey Check
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
Character Transmission

MSI/Plessey AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

4000 4000 4000


MSI/Plessey Label ID 4F00 ("O")
("@") ("@") ("@")

MSI/Plessey Length 0 0 0 0
Control (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable)

MSI/Plessey Maximum
16 16 16 16
Label Length

MSI/Plessey Minimum
4 4 4 4
Label Length

MSI/Plessey Fixed
7 7 7 7
Length 1

MSI/Plessey Fixed
8 8 8 8
Length 2

MSI/Plessey Stitching 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

Standard 2 of 5 Enable 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

Standard 2 of 5 Check
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
Character Calculation

Standard 2 of 5 Check
1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable) 1 (enable)
Character Transmission

Standard 2 of 5 AIM ID 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)

E-12 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Wincor- Single
Aux RS-232 IBM 17 IBM USB
Nixdorf Cable

Standard 2 of 5 Label
5300 ("S") 5300 ("S") 5300 ("S") 5300 ("S") 5300 ("S") 5300 ("S")
ID

Standard 2 of 5 Length 0 0 0 0 0 0
Control (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable) (variable)

Standard 2 of 5 Maxi-
50 50 50 50 50 50
mum Label Length

Standard 2 of 5 Mini-
6 6 6 6 6 6
mum Label Length

Standard 2 of 5 Fixed
10 10 10 10 10 10
Length 1

Standard 2 of 5 Fixed
0 0 0 0 0 0
Length 2

Standard 2 of 5 Stitch-
0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable) 0 (disable)
ing

Product Reference Guide E-13


NOTES

E-14 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Appendix F
Handheld Data Format Requirements
This appendix provides application notes to describe the general format of
data that can be accepted by the scanner through the auxiliary port as
transmitted from a handheld scanner.

Handheld Data Format Requirements General


• 9600 bps, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity.
• RTS is used to "bracket" the data received from the handheld:
RTS must be asserted high during data transmission, and de-
asserted after label transmission is complete. No other flow con-
trol mechanisms are required or supported.
• Symbologies requiring fixed lengths (UPC/EAN) will enforce
length requirements for validation of the label.
• Handheld will be required to transmit start and stop characters
for Codabar and Code 39 labels.
• Appropriate industrial length requirements will be enforced (if
configured) for validation of the label.
• Maximum label lengths will be enforced for label validation (i.e.
labels longer than the maximum label size will not be validated).
• Standard PSC formats generally use a single prefix character. The
specific formats are provided below.

Product Reference Guide F-1


PSC Handheld Data Format Requirements
The following sections describe label transmission formats that are typi-
cally observed in factory configurations of PSC handheld scanners.

RSS-14
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘R4’
• Check character must be included in label
• Application identifier “01” must follow the prefix and preceed the
base label
• Label length excluding prefix characters must be 16 characters.
• Example: ‘R40101044123456789’

RSS Expanded
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ‘R4’
Check character must be included in label

UPC-A
• Number system must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including
prefix must be 13.
• Example: 'A060992011187'.

UPC-A with 2-Digit Supplemental


• Number system must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including
prefix must be 15.
• Example: 'A06099201118712'.

F-2 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


UPC-A with 5-Digit Supplemental
• Number system must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including
prefix must be 18.
• Example: 'A06099201118712345'.

UPC-A with Code 128 Supplemental


• Number system must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'A' - total length including
prefix must be greater or equal to 19 Code 128 Supplemental
codes are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters).
• Characters immediately following base label must be of the form
'8100', '8101' or '8102'.
• Example: 'A0609920111878100000951'.

UPC-E
• Number system must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including pre-
fix must be 9.
• Example: 'E09988750'.

Product Reference Guide F-3


UPC-E with 2-Digit Supplemental
• Number system must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including pre-
fix must be 11.
• Example: 'E0998875012'.

UPC-E with 5-Digit Supplemental


• Number system must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including pre-
fix must be 14.
• Example: 'E0998875012345'.

UPC-E with Code 128 Supplemental


• Number system must be included in label data.
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'E' - total length including pre-
fix must be greater or equal to 15 (code 128 Supplemental codes
are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters).
• Characters immediately following base label must be of the form
'8100', '8101' or '8102'.
• Example: 'E099887508101000951'.

F-4 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


EAN-8
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including
prefix must be 10.
• Example: 'FF00210126'.

EAN-8 with 2-Digit Supplemental


• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including
prefix must be 12.
• Example: 'FF0021012612'.

EAN-8 with 5-Digit Supplemental


• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including
prefix must be 15.
• Example: 'FF0021012612345'.

EAN-8 with Code 128 Supplemental


• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters 'FF' - total length including
prefix must be greater than 16 (code 128 Supplemental codes are
variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters).
• Characters immediately following base label must be of the form
'8100', '8101' or '8102'.
• Example: 'FF002101268102000951'.

Product Reference Guide F-5


EAN-13
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including pre-
fix must be 14.
• Example: 'F1101234567891'.

EAN-13 with 2-Digit Supplemental


• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including pre-
fix must be 16.
• Example: 'F110123456789112'.

EAN-13 with 5-Digit Supplemental


• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including pre-
fix must be 19.
• Example: 'F110123456789112345'.

EAN-13 with Code 128 Supplemental


• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Supplemental data is appended to base label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'F'- total length including pre-
fix must be greater or equal to 20 (code 128 Supplemental codes
are variable length having a minimum of 2 data characters).
• Characters immediately following base label must be of the form
'8100', '8101' or '8102'.
• Example: 'F11012345678918100000951'.

F-6 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 39
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including start, stop and check characters and
excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by
the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this
symbology type.
• Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character '*'.
• Example : '**Code 39.TEST*'.

Code 39-Pharmacode
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including start, stop and check characters and
excluding prefix character must meet requirements imposed by
the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this
symbology type.
• Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'p'.
• Example: 'p*123456789*'.

I 2 of 5
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check characters and excluding prefix
character must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's
fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'i'.
• Example: 'i0123456789'.

Product Reference Guide F-7


Codabar
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix char-
acter must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's
fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character '%'.
• Start stop character sets must meet the matching requirement set
forth by the scanner configuration item Codabar Start Stop Char-
acter Match.
• Start stop character sets must be of the form ABCD/ABCD and
must be included in the label.
• Example: '%s$99.95s' (the lower case ‘s’ at each end of the exam-
ple is a placeholder for the start stop character set).

Code 128
• Prefix must be an ASCII character '#'.
• Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements
imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length con-
trol for this symbology type.
• Function characters may be transmitted as a hexadecimal value
8x. Where x correlates to function characters 1 thru 4 as follows:
• x80 = function code 1
• x81 = function code 2
• x82 = function code 3
• x83 = function code 4
• For Code 128 programming labels the format is of the general
form '#/82nnnnn/r ' - /82 is hexadecimal 82 and /r is carriage
return.
• Example: '#Code_128.Test'.

F-8 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


MSI/Plessey
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix char-
acter must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's
fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character '@'.
• Example: '@144769254'.

Code 93
• Prefix must be an ASCII character '&'.
• Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements
imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length con-
trol for this symbology type.
• Example: '&Code93-test'.

PDF417
• Prefix must be an ASCII character 'P'.
• Label length excluding prefix character cannot exceed 300 charac-
ters. In addition to this, label length excluding prefix character must
meet requirements imposed by the main scanner’s fixed or variable
label length control for this symbology type.

Product Reference Guide F-9


AIM Formats
AIM specifies a 3-character string that is attached as a prefix to the label
data for transmission. Because AIM specifies one identifier for UPC-A,
UPC-E and EAN-13 labels, UPC-A, UPC-E and EAN-13 will be received
from the handheld and transmitted by the scanner as EAN-13. The ']'
character must be the first character received in the label transmission
from the handheld.
The following sections describe the prefix strings and identify what spe-
cific label characteristics can be supported.

UPC-A
• AIM does not specify UPC-A as a separate symbology using this
transmission format - labels will be transmitted as EAN-13.
• Example: ']E00060992011187'.

UPC-E
• AIM does not specify UPC-E as a separate symbology using this
transmission format - labels will be transmitted as EAN-13.
• Example: ']E00000000998875'.

EAN-13
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E0'- total length including pre-
fix must be 16.
• Example: ']E01101234567891'.

EAN-8
• Check digit must be included in label data and is assumed to be
correct.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E4' - total length including pre-
fix must be 11.
• Example: ']E400210126'.

F-10 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


2-Digit Supplemental
• Supplemental data is appended to any EAN base label.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E1'.
• length of Supplemental data including prefix must be 5. Total
required length is 21 for EAN-13 and 16 for EAN-8.
• Examples: addon portion is bolded, data is underlined.

UPC-A 2-Digit addon ']E00060992011187]E112'

UPC-E 2-Digit addon ']E00000000998875]E112'

EAN-8 2-Digit addon ']E400210126]E112'

EAN-13 2-Digit addon ']E01101234567891]E112'

5-Digit Supplemental
• Supplemental data is appended to any EAN base label.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']E2'.
• Length of supplemental data including prefix must be 8. Total
required length is 24 for EAN-13 and 19 for EAN-8.
• Examples: addon portion is bolded, data is underlined.

UPC-A 5-Digit addon ']E00060992011187]E212345'

UPC-E 5-Digit addon ']E00000000998875]E212345'

EAN-8 5-Digit addon ']E400210126]E212345'

EAN-13 5-Digit addon ']E01101234567891]E212345'

Product Reference Guide F-11


Code 128 Supplemental
• Supplemental data is appended to any EAN base label.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']C0'.
• length of Supplemental data including prefix is variable but must
be at least 9.
• Examples: addon portion is bolded, data is underlined.

UPC-A Code 128 addon ']E00060992011187]C08100000951'

UPC-E Code 128 addon ']E00000000998875]C08100000951'

EAN-8 Code 128 addon ']E400210126]C08100000951'

EAN-13 Code 128 addon ']E01101234567891]C08100000951'

Bookland
• The 'Bookland' / ISBN code will be formatted as a vendor spe-
cific AIM label.
• Length of label data including prefix is 13.
• Examples: ']X01234567890'.

Code 39
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including start, stop and check characters and
excluding prefix characters must meet requirements imposed by
the main scanner's fixed or variable label length control for this
symbology type.
• Start and stop characters "*" must be included in label.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']A0' or ']A1'.
• Example: '*]A0Code 39.TEST*'.

F-12 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Codabar
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix char-
acters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's
fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']F0'.
• Start stop character sets must meet the matching requirement set
forth by the scanner configuration item Codabar Start Stop Char-
acter Match.
• Start stop character sets s must be of the form ABCD/ABCD
and must be included in the label.
• Example: ']F0s$99.95s' (the lower case ‘s’ at each end of the
example is a placeholder for the start stop character set).

MSI/Plessey
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check character and excluding prefix char-
acters must meet requirements imposed by the main scanner's
fixed or variable label length control for this symbology type.
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']M0'.
• Example: ']M0144769254'.

Code 93
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']G0'.
• Label length excluding prefix characters must meet requirements
imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length con-
trol for this symbology type.
• Example : ']G0Code93-test'.

Product Reference Guide F-13


RSS-14
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']e0'.
• Check character must be included in label.
• Label length excluding prefix characters must be 14 characters.
• Example: ']e001044123456789'.

RSS Expanded
• Prefix must be ASCII characters ']e0'.
• Label length excluding prefix characters must be at least 1 charac-
ter. Maximum length is the maximum label size supported by the
scanner.
• Example: ']e001900123456789083103001750'.

I 2 of 5
• Check character must be included in label data.
• Label length including check characters and excluding prefix
characters must meet requirements imposed by the main scan-
ner's fixed or variable label length control for this symbology
type.
• Prefix must be an ASCII character ']I1' (other prefixes specify
different check character properties which are not supported).
• Example: ']I10123456789'.

F-14 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Code 128 / EAN128
• Prefix must be either ASCII characters ']C0', ']C1' or ']C2'.
• Label length excluding prefix character must meet requirements
imposed by the main scanner's fixed or variable label length con-
trol for this symbology type.
• If EAN-128 Symbology is Enabled and prefix is ']C1', label will
be identified as an EAN128 otherwise it is identified as a Code
128.
• A prefix of ']C0' designates that no function code is present in the
1st or 2nd character position.
• A prefix of ']C2' designates that a function code 1 is present in
the 2nd character.
• Example : ']C0Code_128.Test'.

PDF417
• Prefix must be an ASCII characters ']L0'.
• Label length excluding prefix character cannot exceed 300 charac-
ters. In addition to this, label length excluding prefix character must
meet requirements imposed by the main scanner’s fixed or variable
label length control for this symbology type.
• Example : ']L0pdf_test_label'.

Product Reference Guide F-15


NOTES

F-16 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


NOTES

Product Reference Guide F-17


NOTES

F-18 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Index
(Short Pedestal Base ONLY) .............................................. 2-26 Code 128 Enable ............................................................. 6-198
2-Digit Supplemental......................................................... F-11 Code 128 Fixed Length 1................................................. 6-206
5-Digit Supplemental......................................................... F-11 Code 128 Fixed Length 2................................................. 6-207
Additional Functions............................................................ 3-7 Code 128 Label ID .......................................................... 6-202
Addons............................................................................. 6-155 Code 128 Length Control................................................ 6-203
AIM Formats ..................................................................... F-10 Code 128 Maximum Label Length .................................. 6-204
Automatic Zero Maintenance............................................... 1-7 Code 128 Minimum Label Length................................... 6-205
Automatic Zero Setting Test ................................................ 5-3 Code 128 Stitching .......................................................... 6-208
Aux Port Mode .................................................................. 6-45 Code 128 Supplemental..................................................... F-12
Bar Codes Supported ......................................................... 1-14 Code 128 Transmit Function Characters ......................... 6-199
Blanking Test..................................................................... 5-11 Code 128 ............................................................................. F-8
Blanking Test..................................................................... 5-16 Code 39 AIM ID ............................................................. 6-186
Bookland AIM ID............................................................ 6-137 Code 39 Check Character Calculation ............................. 6-183
Bookland Label ID........................................................... 6-138 Code 39 Check Character Transmission .......................... 6-184
Bookland............................................................................ F-12 Code 39 Enable ............................................................... 6-181
Cable Pinout ........................................................................B-2 Code 39 Fixed Length 1................................................... 6-191
Cable Pinout ........................................................................B-3 Code 39 Fixed Length 2................................................... 6-192
Cable Pinout ........................................................................B-4 Code 39 Full ASCII ......................................................... 6-185
Cable Pinout ........................................................................B-5 Code 39 Label ID ............................................................ 6-187
Cable Pinout ........................................................................B-6 Code 39 Length Control.................................................. 6-188
Cable Pinout ........................................................................B-7 Code 39 Maximum Label Length .................................... 6-189
Cable Pinout ........................................................................B-8 Code 39 Minimum Label Length..................................... 6-190
Cable Pinout ........................................................................B-8 Code 39 Start Stop Character Transmission..................... 6-182
Cables & Connections ....................................................... 2-22 Code 39 Stitching ............................................................ 6-193
Calibrating the Scale (Pounds & Kilograms) ........................ 5-4 Code 39 ............................................................................. F-12
Calibrating the Scale ............................................................ 3-8 Code 39 ............................................................................... F-7
Calibration Verification (Kilograms) .................................. 5-13 Code 39-Pharmacode........................................................... F-7
Calibration Verification (U.S. Pounds) ................................ 5-8 Code 93 AIM ID ............................................................. 6-239
Changing Weighing Modes................................................ 2-29 Code 93 Enable ............................................................... 6-238
Checkstand Design .............................................................. 2-3 Code 93 Fixed Length 1................................................... 6-244
Checkstand Mounting ....................................................... 2-17 Code 93 Fixed Length 2................................................... 6-245
Checkstand Preparation ..................................................... 2-10 Code 93 Label ID ............................................................ 6-240
Codabar AIM ID ............................................................. 6-230 Code 93 Length Control.................................................. 6-241
Codabar Check Character Calculation ............................. 6-228 Code 93 Maximum Label Length .................................... 6-242
Codabar Check Character Transmission .......................... 6-229 Code 93 Minimum Label Length..................................... 6-243
Codabar Enable................................................................ 6-223 Code 93 Stitching ............................................................ 6-246
Codabar Fixed Length 1................................................... 6-235 Code 93 ............................................................................. F-13
Codabar Fixed Length 2................................................... 6-236 Code 93 ............................................................................... F-9
Codabar Label ID ............................................................ 6-231 Connectors........................................................................... 1-5
Codabar Length Control.................................................. 6-232 Convert Code128 to Code 39.......................................... 6-200
Codabar Maximum Label Length .................................... 6-233 Counter Cutout ................................................................. 2-11
Codabar Minimum Label Length..................................... 6-234 Customizing Your Scanner’s Operation ............................... 6-2
Codabar Start Stop Character Match ............................... 6-227 Decreasing-Load Test......................................................... 5-12
Codabar Start Stop Character Set..................................... 6-225 Decreasing-Load Test......................................................... 5-17
Codabar Start Stop Character Transmission..................... 6-224 Description of Calibration Sequence .................................... 5-2
Codabar Stitching ............................................................ 6-237 Diagnostic Mode ................................................................. 3-7
Codabar ............................................................................. F-13 Diagnostic Modes .............................................................. 2-21
Codabar ............................................................................... F-8 Diagnostic Procedures.......................................................... 4-2
Code 128 / EAN128.......................................................... F-15 Diagnostic Tests................................................................... 4-2
Code 128 AIM ID ........................................................... 6-201 Double Read Timeout ....................................................... 6-11

Product Reference Guide I-1


EAN 128 AIM ID............................................................ 6-210 GTIN 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID............................. 6-162
EAN 128 Label ID........................................................... 6-211 GTIN 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID............................. 6-163
EAN 13 Label ID............................................................. 6-133 GTIN Code 128 Supplemental Label ID......................... 6-164
EAN 8 Label ID............................................................... 6-142 GTIN Enable................................................................... 6-160
EAN-128 Enable.............................................................. 6-209 GTIN Label ID ............................................................... 6-161
EAN-13 128 Supplemental Label ID ............................... 6-136 Handheld Data Format Requirements General .................... F-1
EAN-13 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID.......................... 6-134 Horizontal Scan Window Replacement (WRG)................. 3-13
EAN-13 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID.......................... 6-135 How to Use This Manual..................................................... 1-3
EAN-13 Check Character Transmission .......................... 6-131 I 2 of 5 AIM ID ............................................................... 6-215
EAN-13 Enable................................................................ 6-129 I 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation ............................... 6-213
EAN-13 First Character Transmission ............................. 6-130 I 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission ............................ 6-214
EAN-13 ISBN Conversion Enable ................................... 6-132 I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 .................................................... 6-220
EAN-13 with 2-Digit Supplemental..................................... F-6 I 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2 .................................................... 6-221
EAN-13 with 5-Digit Supplemental..................................... F-6 I 2 of 5 Label ID .............................................................. 6-216
EAN-13 with Code 128 Supplemental................................. F-6 I 2 of 5 Length Control.................................................... 6-217
EAN-13 ............................................................................. F-10 I 2 of 5 Maximum Label Length ...................................... 6-218
EAN-13 ............................................................................... F-6 I 2 of 5 Minimum Label Length ...................................... 6-219
EAN-8 128 Supplemental Label ID ................................. 6-145 I 2 of 5 Stitching .............................................................. 6-222
EAN-8 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID............................ 6-143 I 2 of 5 ............................................................................... F-14
EAN-8 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID............................ 6-144 I 2 of 5 ................................................................................. F-7
EAN-8 Check Character Transmission ............................ 6-140 IBM Features ..................................................................... 6-61
EAN-8 Decoding Levels................................................... 6-146 IBM Interface Options....................................................... 6-61
EAN-8 Enable.................................................................. 6-139 IBM Port 17 Interface Selection......................................... 6-53
EAN-8 with 2-Digit Supplemental....................................... F-5 IBM Scale Address ............................................................. 6-62
EAN-8 with 5-Digit Supplemental....................................... F-5 IBM Transmit Labels in Code 39 Format .......................... 6-64
EAN-8 with Code 128 Supplemental................................... F-5 IBM USB Interface Options .............................................. 6-65
EAN-8 ............................................................................... F-10 IBM USB Interface Selection ............................................. 6-54
EAN-8 ................................................................................. F-5 IBM USB Scanner Device Type......................................... 6-67
EAS Active State ................................................................ 6-43 If You Make a Mistake... ...................................................... 6-9
EAS Timeout ..................................................................... 6-44 Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2).......................................... 5-11
Electrical Specifications ........................................................ 1-9 Increasing- Load Test (Phase 2).......................................... 5-15
Enable EAN Two Label ................................................... 6-154 Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1)........................................... 5-13
Entering and Exiting Programming Mode. .......................... 6-4 Increasing-Load Test (Phase 1)............................................. 5-9
Ergonomic References.......................................................... 2-4 Installation Overview ......................................................... 2-17
Error Codes.......................................................................... 4-3 Installation ......................................................................... 2-31
Error Reporting.................................................................... 3-5 Integrating the Scanner With Your Host System.................. 6-1
Expand EAN-8 to EAN-13 .............................................. 6-141 Interface Related Features .................................................. 6-48
Expand UPC-A to EAN-13 ............................................. 6-114 Interface Type.................................................................... 6-48
Expand UPC-E to EAN-13.............................................. 6-124 Interleaved 2 of 5 (I 2 OF 5) Enable ................................ 6-212
Expand UPC-E to UPC-A ............................................... 6-123 Introduction to Label Programming..................................... 6-1
Flowcharts............................................................................ 4-8 Labeling ............................................................................. 1-12
General Scanner and Scale Features.................................... 6-11 Laser and Product Safety .................................................... 1-10
Global Prefix ...................................................................... 6-57 Laser Timeout.................................................................... 6-13
Global Suffix...................................................................... 6-59 LED and Beeper Indicators .................................................. 6-9
Good Read Beep Control................................................... 6-23 Lighting Considerations..................................................... 2-24
Good Read Beep Frequency ............................................... 6-24 Liquid Spills and Moisture ................................................. 2-10
Good Read Beep Length .................................................... 6-26 Manual Conventions............................................................ 1-3
Good Read Beep Volume................................................... 6-27 Manual Overview................................................................. 1-2
Good Read When to Indicate ............................................ 6-30 Maximum Host-Transmitted Message Length ................... 6-55
Green LED Idle State......................................................... 6-18 Maximum Static Weight (Overload) .................................... 1-6
Grounding ........................................................................... 2-9 Minimum Increment ........................................................... 1-6

I-2 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


Motion Test......................................................................... 5-3 Proper Weighing Technique ................................................ 3-3
Motor Timeout.................................................................. 6-15 PSC Handheld Data Format Requirements ......................... F-2
MSI/Plessey AIM ID........................................................ 6-251 Rated Weight Capacity ........................................................ 1-6
MSI/Plessey Check Character Calculation ....................... 6-248 Remote Display — Enable/Disable .................................... 6-42
MSI/Plessey Check Character Transmission..................... 6-250 Remote Scale Display Placement/Installation ..................... 2-24
MSI/Plessey Enable .......................................................... 6-247 Return to Factory Settings.................................................... 6-9
MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 1 ............................................. 6-256 Return to Zero Test ........................................................... 5-12
MSI/Plessey Fixed Length 2 ............................................. 6-257 Return to Zero Test ........................................................... 5-17
MSI/Plessey Label ID....................................................... 6-252 RS-232 ACK Character ..................................................... 6-90
MSI/Plessey Length Control ............................................ 6-253 RS-232 ACK NAK Enable................................................. 6-88
MSI/Plessey Maximum Label Length............................... 6-254 RS-232 ACK NAK Error Handling ................................... 6-95
MSI/Plessey Minimum Label Length ............................... 6-255 RS-232 ACK NAK Retry Count........................................ 6-94
MSI/Plessey Number of Check Characters....................... 6-249 RS-232 ACK NAK Timeout Value.................................... 6-93
MSI/Plessey Stitching....................................................... 6-258 RS-232 Baud Rate ............................................................. 6-68
MSI/Plessey........................................................................ F-13 RS-232 Beep After Weigh .................................................. 6-86
MSI/Plessey.......................................................................... F-9 RS-232 Beep on ASCII BEL .............................................. 6-85
Normal Operation ............................................................... 3-6 RS-232 Beep on Not on File.............................................. 6-87
Number of Host Transmission Buffers............................... 6-56 RS-232 Features................................................................. 6-68
Operating Mode .................................................................. 3-6 RS-232 Hardware Control ................................................. 6-76
Operational Configuration................................................... 3-5 RS-232 Host Echo Quiet Interval ...................................... 6-81
Operational Controls ........................................................... 3-4 RS-232 Host Echo ............................................................. 6-80
Operational Maintenance................................................... 3-10 RS-232 Ignore Host Commands........................................ 6-82
Operational Modes .............................................................. 3-4 RS-232 Intercharacter Delay .............................................. 6-78
Operational Tests................................................................. 4-1 RS-232 Interface Selection ................................................. 6-50
Operational Verification .................................................... 2-19 RS-232 Label ID Control .................................................. 6-97
Other UPC/EAN Options ............................................... 6-149 RS-232 NAK Character ..................................................... 6-91
PDF417 ............................................................................. F-15 RS-232 Number of Data Bits............................................. 6-72
PDF417 ............................................................................... F-9 RS-232 Number of Stop Bits ............................................. 6-73
Pharmacode 39 Check Character Transmission ............... 6-196 RS-232 Parity .................................................................... 6-74
Pharmacode 39 Enable..................................................... 6-194 RS-232 Retry on ACK NAK Timeout ............................... 6-92
Pharmacode 39 Label ID ................................................. 6-197 RS-232 Single Cable Interface Selection............................. 6-52
Pharmacode 39 Start Stop Character Transmission.......... 6-195 RS-232 Software Flow Control .......................................... 6-79
Physical Parameters .............................................................. 1-6 RS-232 TTL Invert............................................................ 6-84
Placing and Installing the Remote Scale Display ................ 2-26 RS-232 TTL ...................................................................... 6-83
Power Installation ................................................................ 2-9 RS-232 Wincor-Nixdorf Interface Selection....................... 6-51
Power Supply ....................................................................... 1-9 RSS Expanded 2D Component Enable............................ 6-173
Power-up Beep Control...................................................... 6-21 RSS Expanded AIM ID.................................................... 6-174
Power-Up Selftest ................................................................ 4-1 RSS Expanded EAN-128 Emulation................................ 6-172
Power-up ............................................................................. 1-7 RSS Expanded Enable...................................................... 6-171
Power-Up/Selftest & Pre-Operation .................................... 3-4 RSS Expanded Fixed Length 1 ......................................... 6-179
Power-Up/Selftest ................................................................ 3-4 RSS Expanded Fixed Length 2 ......................................... 6-180
Pre-Installation Considerations ............................................ 2-2 RSS Expanded Label ID................................................... 6-175
Preparing the Scanner/Scale for Calibration ......................... 5-4 RSS Expanded Length Control ........................................ 6-176
Price Weight Check ......................................................... 6-151 RSS Expanded Maximum Label Length........................... 6-177
Productivity Index Reporting (PIR) ................................... 6-47 RSS Expanded Minimum Label Length ........................... 6-178
Programming Overview ....................................................... 6-3 RSS Expanded ................................................................... F-14
Programming Sequence........................................................ 6-7 RSS Expanded ..................................................................... F-2
Programming Session........................................................... 6-5 RSS-14 2D Component Enable ....................................... 6-168
Programming via Handheld Device ..................................... 6-3 RSS-14 AIM ID............................................................... 6-169
Programming ....................................................................... 3-7 RSS-14 Check Character Transmission............................ 6-166
Proper Scanning Technique ................................................. 3-2 RSS-14 Enable ................................................................. 6-165

Product Reference Guide I-3


RSS-14 Label ID.............................................................. 6-170 System Power-Up Recap .................................................... 2-33
RSS-14............................................................................... F-14 Test Mode ......................................................................... 6-10
RSS-14................................................................................. F-2 Thermal Equilibrium ........................................................... 1-7
RSS-14/EAN-128 Emulation........................................... 6-167 Understanding the Basics ..................................................... 6-1
Scale Adjustments ................................................................ 3-8 Unpacking ......................................................................... 2-17
Scale Country Mode .......................................................... 6-33 UPC/EAN AIM ID ......................................................... 6-115
Scale Diagnostic Mode....................................................... 2-22 UPC/EAN Reconstruction............................................... 6-150
Scale Enable ....................................................................... 6-32 UPC-A 128 Supplemental Label ID................................. 6-119
Scale Enforced Zero Return ............................................... 6-35 UPC-A 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ........................... 6-117
Scale Error Reporting........................................................... 4-6 UPC-A 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID ........................... 6-118
Scale Interface Type ........................................................... 6-37 UPC-A and EAN-13 Decoding Levels ............................. 6-157
Scale LED Enable .............................................................. 6-41 UPC-A Check Character Transmission............................ 6-113
Scale Motion Level Filter ................................................... 6-39 UPC-A Enable ................................................................. 6-111
Scanner and Scale Reset ....................................................... 3-7 UPC-A Label ID.............................................................. 6-116
Scanner and Scanning-Scale Nomenclature.......................... 1-4 UPC-A Number System Character Transmission............. 6-112
Scanner Button Options .................................................... 6-19 UPC-A with 2-Digit Supplemental ...................................... F-2
Scanner Diagnostic Mode .................................................. 2-21 UPC-A with 5-Digit Supplemental ...................................... F-3
Scanner Installation.............................................................. 2-4 UPC-A with Code 128 Supplemental .................................. F-3
Scanner Maintenance ........................................................... 2-4 UPC-A............................................................................... F-10
Scanner Usage ...................................................................... 2-4 UPC-A................................................................................. F-2
Scanning Items..................................................................... 3-1 UPC-E 128 Supplemental Label ID................................. 6-128
Scanning .............................................................................. 1-6 UPC-E 2-Digit Supplemental Label ID ........................... 6-126
Service Access....................................................................... 2-8 UPC-E 5-Digit Supplemental Label ID ........................... 6-127
Set Single Cable RS-232 ETX Character.......................... 6-109 UPC-E Check Character Transmission ............................ 6-122
Set Single Cable RS-232 STX Character .......................... 6-107 UPC-E Enable ................................................................. 6-120
Set-Up & Installation......................................................... 2-29 UPC-E Label ID .............................................................. 6-125
Set-up ................................................................................ 2-29 UPC-E Number System Character Transmission............. 6-121
Shift Test (Metric) ............................................................. 5-14 UPC-E with 2-Digit Supplemental ...................................... F-4
Shift Test ............................................................................. 5-9 UPC-E with 5-Digit Supplemental ...................................... F-4
Single Cable RS-232 Options ............................................ 6-99 UPC-E with Code 128 Supplemental .................................. F-4
Single Cable RS-232 PSC Extensions............................... 6-110 UPC-E............................................................................... F-10
Single Cable RS-232 RTS CTS Selection......................... 6-101 UPC-E................................................................................. F-3
Single Cable RS-232 Scanner Only Protocol.................... 6-100 User Configurable Warm-up................................................ 1-7
Single Cable RS-232 Use ACK/NAK............................... 6-105 Ventilation and Spacing ....................................................... 2-7
Single Cable RS-232 Use BCC ........................................ 6-104 Vertical Scan Window Replacement .................................. 3-11
Single Cable RS-232 Use ETX......................................... 6-108 Viewing Angle.................................................................... 2-25
Single Cable RS-232 Use STX ......................................... 6-106 Warm-Up Time................................................................... 1-7
Site Preparation Overview.................................................... 2-5 Weighing ............................................................................. 1-6
Sleep Mode .......................................................................... 3-6 What Is Programming Mode? .............................................. 6-4
Standard 2 of 5 AIM ID................................................... 6-262 Zeroing the Scale ................................................................. 3-8
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Calculation .................. 6-260
Standard 2 of 5 Check Character Transmission................ 6-261
Standard 2 of 5 Enable..................................................... 6-259
Standard 2 of 5 Fixed Length 1 ........................................ 6-267
Standard 2 of 5 Fixed Length 2 ........................................ 6-268
Standard 2 of 5 Label ID.................................................. 6-263
Standard 2 of 5 Length Control ....................................... 6-264
Standard 2 of 5 Maximum Label Length.......................... 6-265
Standard 2 of 5 Minimum Label Length .......................... 6-266
Standard 2 of 5 Stitching ................................................. 6-269
Symbology Programming................................................. 6-111

I-4 Magellan® 8100/8100Ω and 8200/8200Ω Scanner


ASCII Character Set
The table on this page shows a set of ASCII characters and their corresponding Hex Values. The
Hex Values in this table are needed for setting symbology specific label identifiers, as well as
enabling custom prefix and suffix characters.

ASCII ASCII ASCII ASCII Hex


Hex No. Hex No. Hex No.
Char. Char. Char. Char. No.

NUL 00 SP 20 @ 40 ‘ 60
SOH 01 ! 21 A 41 a 61
STX 02 “ 22 B 42 b 62
ETX 03 # 23 C 43 c 63
EOT 04 $ 24 D 44 d 64
ENQ 05 % 25 E 45 e 65
ACK 06 & 26 F 46 f 66
BEL 07 ’ 27 G 47 g 67
BS 08 ( 28 H 48 h 68
HT 09 ) 29 I 49 i 69
LF 0A * 2A J 4A j 6A
VT 0B + 2B K 4B k 6B
FF 0C , 2C L 4C l 6C
CR 0D - 2D M 4D m 6D
SO 0E . 2E N 4E n 6E
SI 0F / 2F O 4F o 6F
DLE 10 0 30 P 50 p 70
DC1 11 1 31 Q 51 q 71
DC2 12 2 32 R 52 r 72
DC3 13 3 33 S 53 s 73
DC4 14 4 34 T 54 t 74
NAK 15 5 35 U 55 u 75
SYN 16 6 36 V 56 v 76
ETB 17 7 37 W 57 w 77
CAN 18 8 38 X 58 x 78
EM 19 9 39 Y 59 y 79
SUB 1A : 3A Z 5A z 7A
ESC 1B ; 3B [ 5B { 7B
FS 1C < 3C \ 5C | 7C
GS 1D = 3D ] 5D } 7D
RS 1E > 3E ^ 5E ~ 7E
US 1F ? 3F _ 5F DEL 7F
Asia Pacific Italy
PSC Hong Kong PSC S.p.A.
Hong Kong Vimercate (MI), Italy
Telephone: [852]-2-584-6210 Telephone: [39] (0) 39/62903.1
Fax: [852]-2-521-0291 Fax: [39] (0) 39/6859496

Australia Japan
PSC Asia Pacific Pty Ltd. PSC Japan K.K.
North Ryde, Australia Shinagawa-ku, Tokyo, Japan
Telephone: [61] 0 (2) 9878 8999 Telephone: 81 (0)3 3491 6761
Fax: [61] 0 (2) 9878 8688 Fax: 81 (0)3 3491 6656

France Latin America


PSC S.A.R.L. PSC S.A., INC.
LES ULIS Cedex, France Miami, Florida, USA
Telephone: [33].01.64.86.71.00 Telephone: (305) 591-3222
Fax: [33].01.64 46.72.44 Fax: (305) 591-3007

Germany United Kingdom


PSC GmbH PSC Bar Code Ltd.
Darmstadt, Germany Watford, England
Telephone: 49 (0) 61 51/93 58-0 Telephone: 44 (0) 1923 809500
Fax: 49 (0) 61 51/93 58 58 Fax: 44 (0) 1923 809 505

www.psc.com
PSC Inc.
959 Terry Street
Eugene, OR 97402
Telephone: (541) 683-5700
Fax: (541) 345-7140

©2004 - 2006 PSC INC. R44-2382 (Rev. J) 8/06

You might also like